Konica-Minolta MultiFunctional Printer 240f Develop D240F Parts and Service Manual

KONICA MINOLTA 240f
Develop D240F
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

Version 3
3 March, 2010
DC4-91010-62
Battery Precautions
Important
We do not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries are sold only
as component parts of the main control board, and cannot be purchased separately from us. NiMH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installed inside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them according to local, state and federal regulations.
NOTE
C
ontents of this manual can be changed without prior notice.
There can be errors in this manual even though we have made best efforts to create the accurate manual. We are not liable for any loss and/or damage that are implemented to the MFP by
using this manual.
The parts/components that are used in the MFP are delicate and can be easily damaged if
they are not handled in appropriate method. We recommend strongly that maintenance of MFP
should be made by the maintenance engineers who are the authorize service engineers.
Before starting any work, remove static electricity beforehand.
Table of contents
1 General Description.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Description........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-4
2 Machine Composition..............................................................................2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence......................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Recording Section..........................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Image Processing...........................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram.........................................................................................................2-10
2.5 Circuit board constructions...........................................................................................................2-15
2.6 Sensors........................................................................................................................................2-19
2.7 Function detail and additional information....................................................................................2-21
3 Adjustment Procedures...........................................................................3-1
3.1 Field Service Program Modes........................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment.....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment..........................................................................................................3-19
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes.........................................................................................3-45
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment...........................................................................................................3-49
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings......................................................................................3-74
3.7 All RAM Clear...............................................................................................................................3-74
3.8 T.30 Monitor.................................................................................................................................3-75
3.9 Printer maintenance mode...........................................................................................................3-78
3.10 Service Report Printing..............................................................................................................3-81
3.11 Monitor speaker..........................................................................................................................3-86
3.12 Test Modes.................................................................................................................................3-86
3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and .......................................................................3-92
Unique Switch Settings..............................................................................................................3-92
3.14 Factory Functions.......................................................................................................................3-92
3.15 Line Tests...................................................................................................................................3-97
3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode.................................................................................................3-100
3.17 Consumable order sheet..........................................................................................................3-101
3.18 DRAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-107
3.19 Life monitor maintenance.........................................................................................................3-107
3.20 Sensor input test......................................................................................................................3-109
3.21 Printer diagnostic mode............................................................................................................3-110
3.22 Network service mode..............................................................................................................3-111
3.23 Flash Rom Sum Check............................................................................................................3-112
3.24 Set Service Report...................................................................................................................3-112
3.25 Printer registration adjustment.................................................................................................3-114
3.26 Reset printer trouble.................................................................................................................3-115
3.27 Cleaning mode.........................................................................................................................3-115
3.28 Key counter mode....................................................................................................................3-116
3.29 Network switch mode...............................................................................................................3-116
3.30 Touch panel adjustment...........................................................................................................3-120
3.31 Printer control parameter mode................................................................................................3-120
3.32 Network capture (Packet capture)............................................................................................3-123
3.33 Storage maintenance...............................................................................................................3-126
3.34 Service function menu..............................................................................................................3-127
3.35 Wire cleaning warning..............................................................................................................3-127
3.36 Installing language...................................................................................................................3-127
3.37 Counter information maintenance............................................................................................3-128
3.38 Quick Initial settings.................................................................................................................3-129
3.39 Update the software.................................................................................................................3-129
3.40 Network service functions .......................................................................................................3-137
4 Troubleshooting Procedures...................................................................4-1
4.1 Troubleshooting flow chart.............................................................................................................4-1
i
4.2 Initial checks...................................................................................................................................4-2

4.3 Checkout error................................................................................................................................4-3
4.4 Communication tourble..................................................................................................................4-7
4.5 Image quality problems................................................................................................................4-25
4.6 Document trouble.........................................................................................................................4-41
4.7 Recording Paper Jam...................................................................................................................4-44
4.8 Machine malfunction....................................................................................................................4-45
5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Disassembly procedures................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Adjustment...................................................................................................................................5-92
ii
1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
3
13
12
11
10
6
9
No.
Name
Description
ADF cover
Open this when a document jams and when cleaning the scanning
area.
Document guide
This supports the document so that it is fed straight.
Document tray
Load the document here face up.
Document output tray Scanned documents are output here.
Bypass tray
Used when printing on envelopes, transparencies, and custom paper

sizes.
Side cover 1
Open this when paper jams and when replacing the drum cartridge.
Side cover 2
An optional paper cassette. Open this when paper jams.
Paper level indication The areas indicated in red increase as the paper level in the paper
window
cassette decreases.
Front cover
Open this when replacing the toner cartridge or drum cartridge.
10
Paper cassette 1
This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper.
11
Paper cassette 2
This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper. This cassette is optional.
12
USB connector
Connect USB memory here to save scanned images to USB memory or

print images stored on USB memory.
13
Control panel
This panel includes the touch panel and the keys required for operation.
1-1
14
24
23
15
22
16
21
20
17
19
18
No.
Name
Description
14
Platen cover
This holds down the document.
15
Document glass
Load the document here aligned to the top left of the glass.
16
ADF glass
This is where documents loaded in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)

are scanned.
17
Paper exit tray
The copied or printed paper exits with the printed side down in this tray.
18
Main power switch
This switch is used to turn the machine ON and OFF. Normally, leave
the power ON. Turn it OFF if you do not use the machine for a long
period of time or move it.
19
Power jack
Connect the power cord here.
20
Network connector
Connect the LAN cable here.
21
USB port
Connect the USB cable here.
22
Phone jack
Connect a handset here.
23
External phone jack
Connect an external phone (such as an answering machine) here.
24
Telephone line jack
Connect the modular cable here.
1-2
25
26
27
28
No.
Name
Description
25
Toner cartridge
Load the toner cartridge here.
26
Charge wire cleaning When the print quality drops, move this rod back and forth to clean the
rod
charging needle.
27
Drum cartridge
28
Toner cartridge lock When replacing the toner cartridge, push this lever down the left side,
lever
and then pull out the cartridge.
Load the drum cartridge here.
1-3
1.2 Specifications
Item
Specifications
Copy Specifications / General Specifications

Scanning method
Acceptable document size
Auto document feeder (sheets)
>Doc. Thickness
>Doc. Weight (g/m2)
Paper Media (for MP/Bypass)
Resolution (Max)
Continuous copy speed (Max.)
Color CCD
FBS: Max. F4
ADF: Max. F4
Max:80 sheets
(Letter/Legal 75g/m2 documents)
0.05 - 0.15mm (Single Sheet)
0.07 - 0.12mm (Multi Sheets)
35.0 - 128.0g/m2 (Single Sheet)
52.0 - 105.0 g/m2 (Multi Sheets)
PlainPaper(60-90g/m^2) , PasteBoard(-120g/m^2), Envelope[D
L(SEF),COM#10(SEF),Monarch(SEF)]
/Postcard[100mm(W) 148mm(L) (3.95.8 inch)], OHP*
*does not guarantee all environments or all OHP films
(suggested OHP film: 3M PP2500)
Max:Scanner 600dpi / Printer 600dpi
>A4 SEF 24ppm (picking paper from 1st cassette)

approx. 20sec. (room temperature: 20C)
Warm up time
# of copies
Enlargement/Reduction
>Setting range
>Preset (A4 Setting)
>Preset (LTR Setting)
Recording paper capacity (Std.)
(Max.)
1-99
yes/yes/yes:(FBS/ADF)
FBS: 25 - 400% (1% step)
ADF: 25 - 100% (1% step)
A4: 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%
500sheets(Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)*
*20sheets(PasteBoard,Bypass Tray)
500sheets x 2(Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)
*20sheets(PasteBoard,Bypass Tray)
Fax Specifications
Compatibility
Resolution (Scanning/Tx/Rx)
>Super Fine
>Fine
>Normal
>Grayscale
Telephone network
Transmission speed
Coding method
Modem
>G3:
>SuperG3:
G3 & Super G3
(horizontal x vertical)
600dpi 600lpi or
16 dots/mm15.4 lines/mm (initial setting)
(406 dpi 392 lpi)
*Can be switched by user operation
8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
(203 dpi 98 lpi)
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
PSTN
2sec. level (Super G3)
6sec. (G3)
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
14400,12000,9600,7200,4800,2400bps
Control signal speed: 300bps
33600,31200,28800,26400,24000,
21600,19200,16800,14400,12000,
9600,7200,4800,2400bps
Control signal speed: 2400,1200bps
1-4
Item
Specifications
Other Information
Image data memory capacity (Std.)
RAM 128MB
Copy&FAX: 66MB
Copy Stored pages: 600pages
Fax Stored pages: 4200pages
Memory Backup (Standard)

CF card capacity (Std.)
(Max.)
Interface
72 hours (After 24 hours full-charge)

256MB
1GB
Hi-Speed USB2.0(Std.)
Hi-Speed USB2.0 Host(Std.)
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX(Std.)
Appearance
>Dimensions (W x D x H)
>Dimensions (Max) (W x D x H)
>Weight (without consumables)
LCD
mono
>LCD size
>LCD resolution
Character Input method
Power requirements
Power consumption
>Low Power mode
>Sleep mode
>Standby
>Transmission
>Reception
>Copy
>Max.
Environmental conditions
>Practical temperature
>Practical humidity
Scanner Unit
Scanning method
>Scanning method
>Lamp
>Optical resolution (Max.)
Color scanning
>Color
>Black & White
>Grayscale
Effective scanning width
>Copy
>>A4/Letter
>Fax
>>A4/Letter
Contrast adjustment
>Auto
>Manual (# of levels)
>Modification for the original document
back-ground
Document setting position and Scanning
Alignment (FBS)
Acceptable document size (FBS)
>Auto detection
520506446 mm (Std. 2Way/1cassette)

520506566 mm (Max.: 3Way/2cassette)
23.9 Kg (Std. 2Way/1cassette)
28.9 Kg (Max.3Way/2cassette)
5.7 inch
320dotsx240dots (QVGA)
By QWERTY key on touch panel
AC230V10% 50Hz/60Hz
Std. config. / Max. config.
18.0/18.0 (W)
9.4/9.4 (W)
55.0/55.0 (Wh)
47.0/47.0 (W)
930/930 (W)
940/940 (W)
980/980 (W)
10 - 32 C (when humidity is 68%)
20 - 80 % (when temperature is 30C)
Color CCD
White LED array
600dpi x 600dpi
yes
yes
256 level
A4:210 mm
A4:208 mm
yes, Only Copy mode
yes (5 levels)
Automation (w/o photo mode)
Rear left corner
no
1-5
Item
>Max. W(mm)D(mm)
Document Size
>Auto detection
Specifications
216 x 356 mm (Legal: SEF)
no
*can detect the length after scanning
>Acceptable Doc. Size

>>Single page Document Through Size
>>>Max. Document Size
>>>Min. Document Size
>>>Doc. thickness
>>>Doc. Weight (g/m2)
35g/m2 - 128g/m2
>>Multi pages Document Through Size

>>>Max. Document Size
>>>Min. Document Size
>>>Doc. thickness
>>>Doc. Weight (g/m2)
216 x 356 mm
216 x 139.5 mm
0.07 - 0.12 mm
52.0 - 105.0 g/m2
Scanning Alignment (ADF)
Center
Document setting (ADF)

Auto document feeder (sheets)
(ADF)
Face up
80 sheets (A4(SEF), F4(SEF), A5(LEF))
216 x 900 mm
120 x 100 mm
0.05 - 0.15 mm
Scanning resolution
>Copy (B/W)
(Auto,Text, Photo, Photo/Text, Background
Off)
>Fax
>>Memory transmission
>>>Super Fine
>>>Fine
>>>Normal
>>>Grayscale
>>>Background off
>>Real-time transmission
>>>Super Fine
>>>Fine
>>>Normal
>>>Grayscale
>>>Background off
>PC-Scan (B/W) (Auto,Text,Text/
Photo,photo,Background)
>>>Optical Resolution
Default
>TWAIN
All modes: 600 dots/inch x 600 lines/inch
600dpi 600dpi or
(406 dpi 392 lpi)
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
(203 dpi 98 lpi)
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
600dpi 600dpi or
(406 dpi 392 lpi)
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
(203 dpi 98 lpi)
16 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm
(406 dpi 392 lpi)
(203 dpi 196 lpi)
600dpi 600dpi
300dpi 300dpi
200dpi 200dpi
100dpi x 100dpi
300dpi 300dpi
1-6
Item
>Scan to Folder (SMB)
>Scan to E-mail
>Scan to FTP
>Scan to User
>Scan to USB
>PC-Scan (Color) (Auto, Text, Text/Photo,
photo)
>>>Optical Resolution
Default
>TWAIN
>Scan to Folder (SMB)
>Scan to E-mail
>Scan to FTP
>Scan to User
>Scan to USB
Grayscale (B/W)
Mode Selection
>Resolution (Fax Tx)
>Doc. Type (Copy)
> Resolution/Doc. Type(Mono PC Scan)
Specifications
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
600dpi 600dpi
300dpi 300dpi
200dpi 200dpi
100dpi x 100dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
300dpi 300dpi
256 levels
yes, Normal/Fine/Super-Fine/Photo/Background off
(default: Normal)
yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo/Background off
(default: Text&Photo )
yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo
yes, 100dpi/200dpi/300dpi/600dpi
(default: 300dpi/Text&Photo(Auto))
> Resolution(Color PC Scan)
yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo
yes, 100dpi/200dpi/300dpi/600dpi
(default: 300dpi/Text&Photo)
>Contrast (Fax Tx)

(Copy)
(PC Scan B/W)
(PC Scan Color)
yes, Auto, 5levels (default:Normal )

yes, Auto,5levels (default:Auto )
yes, 5levels (default:Normal )
yes, 5levels (default:Normal )
Printer Unit
Sensitive drum type
Printing method
Exposure method
Charging Method
Cleaning Method
Developing method
Fusing method
Recording paper size
(1st - 2nd Cassette)
(Bypass Tray)
Margin
>Copy
>>Top/Bottom
>>Left/Right
>FAX
>>Top/Bottom
>>Left/Right
OPC drum
Dry & Electrophotographic method
LED
multi-stylus electrode
Manual
Mono Component non-magnetic development method
Heat Fixing by the heat roller
A4(SEF), A5(LEF), F4(SEF)
Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF),
Executive (SEF), A6 (SEF), A5 (SEF/LEF),
A4 (SEF), F4 (SEF), DL (SEF), COM#10 (SEF),
Monarch (SEF), Postcard (SEF),
Custom Size(width:97-216mm, length:140-356mm)
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
1-7
Item
>Printer
>>Top/Bottom
>>Left/Right
Print speed (Max.)
Specifications
Duplex Print speed (Max.)
3mm
3mm
24ppm (A4 SEF, print from 1st cassette)
24PPM (A5 LEF, print from 1st cassette)
6.8ppm (A4 SEF, print from 1st cassette)
Alignment
Warm up time
Paper Supply
Upper left
approx. 20sec. (room temperature: 20C)
Cassettes + Bypass Tray
Recording paper capacity (Standard)

(Max.)
Recording paper
>Cassette (1st-2nd)
>Bypass Tray
>>Paper Media (for MP/Bypass)
500sheets (Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)

500sheets (Cassette) x 2 + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)
>>Recording paper size
Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF),

Executive (SEF), A6 (SEF), A5 (SEF/LEF),
A4 (SEF), F4 (SEF), DL (SEF), COM#10 (SEF),
Monarch (SEF), Postcard (SEF),
Custom Size(width:97-216mm, length:140-356mm)
* Paper except A4, F4 and A5 (LEF) should be supplied from
Bypass Tray
Weight of Recording paper
60-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb(Casette)

60-120 g/m2, 20-28 lb (Bypass tray)
Face down
250 sheets (A4SEF) (N-N environment)
Cartridge type with developer
16,000 sheets (A4/Letter, 6%) or Driving Time
Out put type of Recording paper

>Out put paper tray capacity
Toner Cartridge
Toner Quantity
Drum Cartridge
>Drum Life(2page-cycle print)
>Duplex Print
>Mechanical Counter
FAX Tx Function
Transmission
>Width of document
>Length of document
TTI
># of TTI
>Subscriber ID
Real-time transmission
1st: (Standard) / 2nd: (Option)

Plain Paper, Pasteboard, Envelope/Postcard, OHP*
* does not guarantee all environments conditions or all OHP
films (suggested OHP film: 3M PP2500)
30,000 sheets (A4/Letter, 2-page cycle print) and

Driving Time (2-page cycle print)
yes
yes(option)
A4 width
900mm(Normal, Fine)
550mm(Hfine, Ufine)
22 characters
3
20 characters
yes (ADF only)
-When Archiving setting is ON, Scanner TX(RealTime Tx/
Manual Tx) is not be able to use.
Memory transmission
Quick memory transmission
Error Correction / Re-transmit
>ECM
# of transmit reservation
yes
yes
yes
100 commands
FAX Rx Function
Reception Size
>Width of Recording paper
>Length of Recording paper
Memory reception
Max.A3
No limit
yes
1-8
Item
Rx print reduction
Out-of-Paper reception
Reception mode
Special Function
My Jobs
># of Jobs
># of characters
Title
># of job steps
Soft Key
># of Setting
>Set available functions(FAX)
>Set available functions(COPY)

>Set available functions(PRINT)
>Set available functions(SCAN)
Specifications
yes
yes (250 faxes)
FAX Ready, TEL/FAX Ready, FAX/TEL Ready, ANS/FAX
Ready, TEL Ready
yes
6
40
yes
(displays the first 26 characters of registered characters)
N/A (no limit)
yes
5
Resolution,Contrast,Redial,Monitor,Speed-Dial,AutoDist.
Group Tx,Auto Rx,SecurityRx,TTI,Cover Page,Tx Report,
FileFormat,Scan Size,Next Doc., Polling, F-Polling, Polling
Doc., F-Code Tx, F-Code Doc., Closed Tx., ID Check, Memory
Tx,Dialing Options,Boradcast,Mail Address,Mail History,e-mail
Subject,Batch Tx,CheckMail,Delayed Tx, E Gateway
Zoom,Card Copy,Duplex Copy, Doc.Size, Doc.Type, Bypass,C
ontrast,Sort,Combine,Next Doc., DocIndex
no
Doc.Type, Contrast, Resolution, Zoom, Scan Size,Next Doc.,
Color,DuplexScan,Broadcast,Batch Scan,FileFormat,SpeedDial,File Name,Mail Address,e-mail Subject,Mail History,Color
Adjust,Attachment,Category,Comments,TWAIN Box,Scan
Path,Hold Time
>Default Setting
>>Copy
>>Scan
>>Fax
Paper Source Setting
>Fax/ List Print
>Copy
>PC Print
Security Communication Function
>Confirmation of Broadcast Destinations
>Twice Dialing
>Security Reception
User Access & Usage Control
>Communication Administration
>Copy Administration
>Scan Administration
>Print Administration
yes (OFF, ON)

yes (OFF, ON)
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (ON/OFF)
yes (ON/OFF)
yes (ON/OFF)
yes (ON/OFF)
Energy Saving
>Hard Key on control panel
>Low power mode
>>Entering time setting range
>Sleep Mode
>>Entering time setting range
>Auto Recover Time Set
Communication Data Archive
yes
yes
yes (Green LED)
1-60min
yes (Red LED)
1-120min
yes (Start Time/End Time)
yes
Doc.Type/Contrast/DuplexCopy/Sort/Card Copy
Doc.Type/Contrast/Resolution/FileName/Color
Resolution/Contrast/Redial/Monitor/Broadcast
1-9
Item
Day light saving time
>Default(Start Day&Time/End Day & Time)
>Start/End Timing Setting
Consumables Auto Order System
># of destinations to order (FAX)
># of destinations to order (E-Mail)
>Order timing
Service Call Error Notice
># of destinations to send notice (E-mail)
>Notice Timing
Specifications
yes
Start: 1:00AM on the last Sunday of March
End : 1:00AM on the last Sunday of October
yes (by memory switch), month and week
yes (Send/Print/OFF) (Default : OFF)
1 location
(1 Service call number can set)
1 location
Low Toner Warning/Drum Near End
yes
3
when the service call error happens
PC-FAX Basic Function

Support for Network
Communication Protocol
Data Format
Communication Capability (PC-FAX)
Yes
HTTP/HTTPS/RAW/LPD
TIFF
Document Size
Coding Method
A3/B4/A4
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Communication Standard
Transmission Speed
Tx Function (PC-FAX)
T.30(FAX)/T.37(I-FAX)
Max. 33.6Kbps(FAX)/MAX. 100Mbps(I-FAX)
Direct Tx from Applications

Tx by Client User
Transmit reservation command
# of Transmit reservation command
Broadcast Transmission
Max. # of Destinations
yes (by FAX Driver)

yes
Exclusive command file
Less than 100 (less than 90 when using archive function)
Group Transmission
Max. # of Group
Fax/E-mail mixed Tx
Auto Distribution (Message Board)
yes
address book groups
yes
Routing Conditions
All received Fax
Routing Conditions setting
TSI
Partial conditions match
Multiple conditions(OR)
Caller ID
Number display
ITU-T Subaddress/Password
Subaddress Multiple
conditions(OR)
From Address book
RX line
AND/OR
Routing Conditions
yes
yes
yes
yes (prefix match/exact match/suffix match/partial match)
no
no
N/A
N/A
no
N/A
N/A
yes
no
Max.4060
- address book(fax): 2000
- address book(ifax): 2000
- direct input(fax): 30
- direct input(ifax): 30
yes (according to fax/email address in the address book)

N/A
no
(AND in a routing table, OR between the routing tables)
1-10
Item
Routing Destination
To User
# of User
# of User Group
To FAX
by Speed Dial
by Optional Address Book
by Panel
by LDAP Server
To Mail
by Optional Address Book
by Panel
by LDAP Server
The attachment file format
To Shared holder
by Shortcut
by input folder path
by Browsing
Routing protocol
SMB (Windows)
NFS(Linux)
AppleTalk(Mac)
Attachment file format
To FTP
by Panel
by Shortcut
To Box
Expansion setting
>Shared inbox
>>Classification
Distribution Schedule
>Always
>Day of the Month setting (Start/End)
>Day of the Week setting (Start/End, Every
week)
>Time setting (Start/End)
Auto Print of distributed document (ON/OFF)
Specifications
200 (fixed)
200 (fixed)
no
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
TIFF-S/TIFF-F/PDF
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
TIFF/PDF/Encrypted PDF
no
no
yes (share box, delete box)
yes
no
yes
yes
yes (can not specify the days of the week with specified time)
yes
yes
Routing setting operation from machine control

panel
>Auto Print of distributed document
no
>Suspend of routing (by record)
yes
>Suspend of routing (All records)
yes
Communication Log
Display Communication Log
Auto Print
Manual Print
File download
yes (Control Panel/Browser)

yes
yes (Control Panel/Browser)
yes (CSV format only: max. 20)
1-11
Item
Copier Function
# of copies
# of copying job
Enlargement/Reduction
>Setting range
>Preset
Contrast adjustment
>Auto
>Manual (# of levels)
>Modification for the original document background
Copy mode
Copy Resolution
Half tone level
Automatic Paper Selection
Automatic Magnification Selection
Duplex copy
Electric sorting
Rotation copy
Auto tray change (limitless paper supply)
Image edit
>N in 1 copy
>Card Copy
>>Document Size
>>Custom Size Setting

Dialing / TEL Function
Speed Dial
># of locations
Auto dial registration name indication
Phone line type
On hook dial
Caller ID
External telephone
Phone line Cable
Auto Answering
Lists
Dial list
>Speed Dial
>Group number list
My Jobs list
Polling
>Reserved documents print
Communication reservation
>Reserved documents print
Activity journal
>Manual printing
>Auto printing
Specifications
1-99
10 jobs
yes/yes (FBS), no/yes (ADF)
FBS: 25-400% (1% step)
ADF: 25-100% (1% step)
FBS: 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%
ADF:70%,81%,86%, 100%
yes
yes (5 levels)
Automatic
Auto,Text, Text/Photo, Photo,Background
600 x 600 dpi
256 levels
yes
yes
yes (manual duplex scan)
yes
yes(Only reduction
yes (when Auto Cassette is selected and the same sized paper
is inserted in 1st/2nd casettes or in the Bypass tray.)
yes (2 / 4 in 1, rotation support)
yes
Personal Check Size:106x210mm
Business Check Size: 105x150mm
Credit Card Size: 86x56mm
2 Credit Card Size: 102x86mm
yes
2,000
yes (when pressing the indication button)
Tone
yes
no
yes (possible to connect the answering machine)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes, Latest 100 comms (Fax Tx & Rx, I-Fax Tx & Rx, Scan to
folder, Scan to FTP / independently)
yes, Latest 100 comms (Fax, I-Fax, Scan to folder and Scan to
FTP in total)
1-12
Item
>Daily Printing
System settings list
T-30 monitor list
PC-Print Basic Function
Configuration
Support for Local
Support for Network
Data Transfer Protocol
>Standard TCP/IP
>>LPR
>>Port9100
>>>Port9100 SNMP
>>>Port9100 PJL
>IPP
>IPDS
Print Language
GDI
PCL5e
PCLxL
PJL Command
Font
>Latin
>Barcode/OCR
>Cyrillic
PS3
Font
>Latin
PDF
Font
>Latin
XPS
Printer Controller (PCL5e/XL)
Text Print
Printer Setting
>I/O Time-Out setting
>Form Setting[Line/Pages]
>Resolution
>CR/LF
PCL Font
>Font Type
>Font Pitch
>Font Size
Specifications
yes, (Print Time can be Set/ Excluding I-FAX, Folder, FTP /
Print if there is no Tx/Rx)
yes
yes (Service Function)
GDI(Standard), PCL/XPS(Standard), PS3/PDF Direct(Option)
yes, USB2.0 (High Speed)
yes, 10/100Mbps(Auto Negotiation or fixed)
yes (IPv4)
yes
yes
(WindowsXP or later except Windows 2000)
yes
yes (IPv4/IPv6) IPP version1.0
yes (with PCL) (with AXIS Print Server) (for IBM AS400)
yes (Standard)
yes (Standard)
yes (Standard)
yes
yes
80 fonts
32 fonts (Option) (PCL5e Only)
15 fonts (PCL5e Only)
yes
yes
136 fonts
yes, PDF1.7 Compatibility
yes
136 fonts
yes
Yes(Only Network Connection, Local Connection is not
supported.)
yes
(Default: 300 sec.)
yes
5 -128 (Default: Auto)
yes
600 / 300 (Default: 600dpi)
yes
CR only, LF only/CR=CR+LF, LF=LF/CR=CR, LF=CR+LF/
CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF
(Default: CR only, LF only)
Yes
(Default: Courier)
yes
0.44-99.99
(Default: 10.0)
yes
4.00-999.75
(Default: 12.0)
1-13
Item
>Symbol Set
ScanFunction
Local Scanner(via USB)
Network Scanner(via LAN)(option)
Setting method
Scanning Color
>Color
>Black & White
>>Bi Level
>Grayscale
Resolution
>Scanning Resolution
>Data Transfer Resolution
Specifications
Yes
(Default: PC-8 Code Page 437)
yes (TWAIN-scan box only)
yes(TWAIN-scan box)
Embedded in MFP body
yes
yes
yes
Max. 256 levels
600 dpi x 600 lpi
300 dpi x 300 lpi (default)
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Interface
600 dpi x 600 lpi

300 dpi x 300 lpi
200 dpi x 200 dpi
100 dpi x 100 dpi
USB/LAN
Specification of client PC
>Support PC, WorkStation
PC/AT compatible machine
>Support OS
>>Windows95 (English)
>>Windows 98
>>Windows 98 Second Edition
>>Windows Millennium Edition
>>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a or later)
>>Windows 2000 Professional
>>Windows XP Home Edition
>>Windows XP Professional
>>Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
>>Windows Server 2003
>>Windows Server 2003 x64
>>Windows Vista Home Basic
>>Windows Vista Home Premium
>>Windows Vista Business
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
>>Windows Vista Enterprise

>>Windows Vista Ultimate
>>Windows Vista Home Basic x64 Edition
>>Windows Vista Home Premium x64 Edition
>>Windows Vista Business x64 Edition
>>Windows Vista Enterprise x64 Edition
>>Windows Vista Ultimate x64 Edition
>>Windows 7
>>Mac (10.2, 10.3, 10,4 10.5)
>>Linux
>>Unix
>Required Disk Space for driver installation
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (network only)
yes (network only)
Will be supported in running change.
no
no
no
10MB and over
1-14
Item
Scanner Driver
>Scanning System
>Document Size setting
>Document Type setting
>Resolution setting
>Image Preview
>Scanning area setting
>Scan Box
>># of boxes
>># of documents/box
>># of pages/document
>>Password
>Driver Open Control (Hooters special)
Transferring File Format
>MH
>MR
>MMR
>JBIG
>JPEG
>PDF
Scan Advanced Functions
Batch Scan
>ON (1 stuck -> 1 file)
>OFF(1 page -> 1 file)
>Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file)
Destinations
>Scan to E-mail
Specifications
yes (TWAIN driver, version 1.9)
TWAIN: Scan box type
yes
no
No conversion/400/300/200dpi (default: No conversion)
yes
no
yes
30
99
9999
yes
no
(no real-time-TWAIN support)
no
no
yes (mono)
no
yes (color)
no
yes (default)
no
yes
Select from AddressBook
Direct address input
Select from E-mail history
LDAP search
User Mail Address
>Scan to Folder
Select from Folder Shortcut

Browse
(max. 5 destinations at 1 job)
>Scan to FTP
Select from FTP Shortcut

Direct link input
(max. 5 destinations at 1 job)
>Scan to User
>Scan to USB Memory
>Scan to Shared Box
Scan to Print Function
DocIndex Function
Create PDF file with Password lock
Select from Message Board Users

yes(USB)
yes (Box)
yes
yes (Type A, B, C, D)
yes
Encryption algorithm: RC4 40bit/128bit, AES(default: RC4
40bit)
Authority: print, edit, copy
I-FAX Basic Function

Support for Network
Data Format
yes 10/100Mbps (Auto-Detection)

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
1-15
Item
Specifications
Transmission protocol
Reception protocol
Communication speed
Encoding
Document Size
Communication standard
Simple mode
Full mode
Resolution
SMTP/ESMTP
SMTP/POP3
Max.100Mbps
MIME/Base64
A3/B4/A4 (only A4 from the main unit)
ITU-T T.37
yes
yes
8dpm3.85lpm (200100dpi)
8dpm7.7lpm (200200dpi)
16dpm15.4lpm (400400dpi)
600600dpi
Coding method
>MH
>MR
>MMR
>JBIG
Coding method
TIFF-FX
>Profile-S(A4/MH/200dpi)
>Profile-F(A3/MMR/600dpi)
>Profile-J(A3/JBIG/600dpi)
>Profile-C (A3/JPEG/600dpi)
PDF
>Image (BW MMR)
>Image (C JPEG)
>characters
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
I-FAX Tx Function
I-FAX Tx from Application
I-FAX Tx by Client User
Transmit reservation command file
# of Tx Reservation
Broadcast
# of Locations
yes (Use FAX driver)

yes (Browser/Panel)
Dedicated command file
Max 100
(Max. 90 when Archiving setting is ON)
2,030
- 2000(Address Book)
- 30(Direct Input)
Group Tx
yes
# of Groups
Security
S/MIME
PGP/MIME
Rx E-mail Forward to Fax
(Off ramp Gateway)
T.37 Standard (FAX=XXX@XXX)
Lightning FAX
Direct SMTP Transmission
Direct DNS
SIP
Reroute Tx
Fax/E-mail mixed Tx
Duplex scanning
Manual duplex scanning
Auto Document Division
normal mode (1stack 1file)
200 (fixed)
no
no
no
yes
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
1-16
Item
Specifications
Page mode(1page 1file)

Sheet mode(1Sheet 1file)
E-mail resend
SMTP Authentication
Authentication method
I-FAX Rx Function
no
yes
yes
yes
LOGIN, PLAIN, CRAM-MD5
Text E-mail Reception

English
Other Language
Font
Mail Rx with the attachment file
TIFF-FX
Profile-S
Profile-F
Profile-J
Profile-C
PDF
CCITT
Rx by using POP3
Auto Reception/Auto Print
Auto Reception/Manual Print
Manual Reception
APOP Authentication
Rx by using SMTP
ESMTP Support
Access Limitation (Filter)
Multiplex communication
Printer Driver
yes
yes
Languages supported by Latin1
Bitmap font 1 style (26dot)
Paper Size Setting

>(Simplex Printing)
yes
[Cassette]
Letter(SEF), Half-Letter(LEF), Legal(SEF)
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes (PDF made by this machine only)
yes
yes
yes (by Received Mail Routing)
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes (default 1 session)
[Bypass Tray]
Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF),
Executive(SEF), A6(SEF), A5(LEF),
A4(SEF), F4(SEF), DL(SEF), COM#10(SEF),
Monarch(SEF), Postcard(SEF),
Custom Size (width:3.82-8.50 inches, length:5.51-14.01
inches)
>(Duplex Printing)
[Cassette]
A4(SEF), F4(SEF)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF)
[Bypass]
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), A4(SEF), F4(SEF)
Custom Paper Setting

>Size Edit
>Name
>Short Edge
>Long Edge
Paper Supply Setting
default: A4(LEF)
yes
yes, 50 patterns
20 characters
3.82-8.5 inches
97-216mm
5.51-14.01 inches
140-356mm
yes, Auto/Cassette1-2/Bypass Tray
1-17
Item
Specifications
Paper Media Setting
Yes
Plain, Pasteboard, OHP, Envelope/Postcard
(Default: Plain)
Cover sheet
Sort Print
>Electric Sort
Resolution
>600x600 dpi
>300x300 dpi
Toner Saving
yes
Preset Enlarge/Reduction
>1% zoom
Fit to Paper
Combine Print
Duplex Print
Watermarks
Security Print
TrueType Mode
Specification of client PC
>Support PC, WorkStation
yes
yes, 25% - 400% (1% step)
yes
yes (2-up/4-up/8-up)
yes
GDI: no / PCL&PS: yes (default: OFF)
yes
GDI: no / PCL&PS: yes
>Support OS
>>Windows 98
>>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a or later)
>>Windows Vista Ultimate
>>Windows Vista Home Premium x64 Edition
>>Windows 7
>>Mac (10.2, 10.3, 10,4 10.5)
>>Linux
>>Unix
>>>Sun Solaris
yes, (Default: Off)

yes (default)
yes
yes, On/Off (Default: Off)
PC/AT compatible machine
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (PS3 w/ PPD only)
yes (PS3 w/ PPD only)
(RedHat 9, 3, 4, 5/ SUSE 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11/
Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10/ /Tunbo LinuxFUJI 11/
Debian 4)
yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
Version: 9 / 10
1-18
Item
>>>HP-UX
>>>AIX
>>>Others
>>AS400
>CPU
>Required Memory quantity
>Required Disk Space for Driver Installation
Others
>HP PJL Support
>Citrix
Specifications
yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
Version: 11i v1/ 11i v1.5 / 11i v1.6 / 11i v2/11i v3
yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
Version: 5L 5.3 / 6.1
yes (PCL 5e only)
Version:V5R1 / V5R2 / V5R3 / V5R4 / V6R1
Depends on the Operation System
Depends on the Operation System
10MB and more
GDI: no / PCL: yes

yes
Citrix Presentation Server 4.5(XenAPP 4.5)
w/ Windows Server 2003 x86
>Shared Print(Microsoft Point and Print)
yes (Only STD-TCP/IP)

*XPS does not supports the following combinations.
**Client: Windows Vista x64 / Server Windows 2008 x64
**Client: Windows 2008 x64 / Server Windows2008 x64
>Oracle
no
>SAP
yes (PCL 5e, PS3)

Version:SAP R/3 Enterprise(4.7),
SAP ERP 2004,
SAP ERP 6.0
Fax Driver
Fit to Page
Coding Method
Resolution
> 8 dpm7.7 lpm (200200 dpi)
> 16 dpm15.4 lpm (400400 dpi)
> 24 dpm23.1 lpm (600600 dpi)
Halftone
Support for OS
>Support OS
>>Windows 98
>>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a and
later)
>>Windows Vista Home Premium x64
Edition
yes
MMR
yes
yes
yes
256 levels (Dither Matrix)
8 dpm7.7 lpm (200200 dpi)
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
1-19
Item
>>Windows 7
>>Mac
>>Linux
>>Unix
>>>Sun Solaris
>>>HP-UX
>>>AIX
>>>Others
>>AS400
Shared Print (Microsoft Point and Print)
Specifications
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes (supported by specific version and settings)
yes (Only STD-TCP/IP) (Only Simple Mode)
(WindowsOS except Windows2000(Client/Server)
PC Utility
TIFF Maker
yes
Cover Page Editor
yes
Info Monitor
Address Book Setting (Message Board)
Address Book
Stored Location
# of Address
Address Book Import/Export
>CSV
>vCard
Group
># of Groups
User Information Setting (Message Board)
yes
Display/Setting Method
User Information Operation
>New Registration
>Edit
Browser
>Delete
>Forced Delete
>Import/Export
>vCard Format
User Information Item
>User Name
>User ID
>Password
>Type (Gateway User)
>Company
>Department Name (User Group Name)
>Group Name
>TEL
>Fax
>E-mail Address
>LDAP Server Login
TCP/IP Settings
Setting Method
yes
CF Storage
2,000
yes
yes
200
yes (only for Admin.)

yes (Admin can edit all users data, but user can edit only his
own data.)
yes (Name/Company/Fax/E-mail)
64 characters
yes 64 characters
28 characters
no
50 characters
100 characters
yes
40 digits
40 digits
50 characters
yes
yes (Control panel/Browser)
1-20
Item
TCP/IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DNS Server Address
DNS Suffix
DHCP Setting (ON/OFF)
Network Environment Initialize
MAC Address Display
PING
Specifications
yes
yes
yes (max. 1 addresses)
yes (max. 2 addresses)
yes
yes, renew command is supported
yes
yes
yes (Control panel only)
SMB Setting
NetBIOS
Workgroup
WINS
HTTP Port No. Change
HTTPS Port No. Change
Client Port No. Change
InfoMonitor Port No. Change
Message Board Port No. for searching Change
RAW port No. Change
E-mail Settings (only Admin.)
yes
yes
yes
yes (max. 1 address)
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
Attachment File Format
TIFF-FX(Profile-S)
TIFF-FX(Profile-F)
PDF
Coding Method of TIFF-FX (Profile-F)

Archive Settings (only Admin.)
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Auto Archiving ON/OFF

Documents for Archiving
Memory Tx Fax
PC-Fax Tx
Tx I-Fax
Memory Rx Fax
Rx I-Fax
Fax Forward Tx
Real-time Tx Fax
Manual Tx Fax
F-code Secure Box Rx Fax
F-code Bulletin Box Rx Fax
Polling Rx Fax
F-code Polling Rx Fax
Polling Tx Fax
F-code Polling Tx Fax
Scanned Document
Print Document
Copy Document
Report Tx
Canceled Jobs
yes (Control panel/Browser)
Archiving Destinations
E-mail Address
Fax Number
Folder
FTP Address
User
File Format of archived document
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
PDF / TIFF-S / TIFF (default: TIFF-S)
1-21
Item
Specifications
Index file of archived documents

Data Type
Communication Executed Time
File Name
File Path
# of pages
Sender
Destination
Communication Result
Archiving setting by user
Network Scan Setting (only Admin.)
Batch Scan Setting
ON (1 stuck -> 1 file)
OFF(1 page -> 1 file)
Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file)
Storage Period of scanned Document
yes, when the network folder is selected as destination (CSV

format, up to 1000 logs in 1 file)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes (default)
no
yes
yes,1-99 days/Indefinite (default: 30days)
Shortcut Settings
Create Folder Short-cut
The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity
increase
Create FTP URL Short-cut
The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity
increase
Initial Settings (only Admin.)
File format of preview document
TIFF
PDF
File format of documents downloaded from
Message Board (CF)
TIFF
PDF
Delete/Leave documents after download
yes (max. 300 short-cuts)

no
yes (max. 20 short-cuts)
no
yes (default)
yes
yes (default)
yes
yes
SNMP Agent Setting

Setting Method
Service Activate ON/OFF
Agent Recognition Setting
Contact Destination
Name
Location
Security Setting
Community Name
Browser
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
- Write: private
- Read: public
SNMP Agent Initialize
yes
Version 1
MIB (Management Information Base)

MIB support version
Standard MIB Information
Private MIB Information
MIB-2
LDAP Basic Specification

LDAP Supported Version
Version.2
Version.3
no
yes
LDAP Operation
1-22
Item
Specifications
Search
Programmable LDAP Server
yes
# of LDAP Server
LDAP Setting Parameters
Name
LDAP Server Name
IP Address
LDAP Port #
Search Base
Auto detection of the search starting point
# of max. results setting
Time Limit
Authentication
anonymous
name
name+password
Description
Search Method
LDAP Search Operation
Search Method
Name
Default Name Description1
Default Name Description2
# of characters
E-Mail
Default E-Mail Description1
Default E-Mail Description2
# of characters
Fax #
Default Fax Description1
Default Fax Description2
# of characters
TEL#
Default TEL Description1
Default TEL Description1
# of characters
Organization
Default Organization Description1
Default Organization Description1
# of characters
Company Name
Company Name Default1
Company Name Default2
# of characters
Search Rule Setting
Search Key Rule Setting
Equal
Initial
Final
Any
Not Equal
Not Any
yes, 23 characters
yes, 99 characters
yes
yes
yes, 99 characters
yes
yes, 001-100 (default 50)
yes, 0000-9999 (default: 0000 = Unlimited)
yes
yes
yes
yes, 49 characters
Any, Initial, Final, Equal, Not Use
yes
cn
commonname
49 characters
yes
mail
49 characters
yes
facsimileTelephoneNumber
49 characters
yes
telephonenumber
49 characters
no
N/A
N/A
N/A
yes
company
o
49 characters
yes
Default setting
yes
yes
yes
yes (default)
no
no
1-23
Item
Specifications
Exist
Not Use
Operation Interface
MFP Control Panel
Browser via network
Supported character codes
no
yes
US ASCII
UTF-8
yes
yes (Shift JIS, Latin1)
yes
yes(Multi Clients)
Supported directory servers

Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2000
server (ENG)
server (ENG)
server (ENG)
Novell e-Directory on Windows 2000
server(ENG)
OpenLDAP on LINUX(ENG)
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
Supported Authentication Servers

Windows NT 4.0 Server SP4 later
Windows 2000 Server(Active Directory)
Windows Server 2003(Active Directory)
no
yes
yes
Supported Protocol for Authentication

Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003
N/A
Kerberos v5
Kerberos Basic Functions

Encryption Type
Renewal of Tickets
Cache of Tickets
Clock Synchronization Method
RC4 HMAC
no
no
SNTP version1
LDAP Basic Functions for MFP Authentication

SASL Support
Search Filter
GSSAPI(only Network Authentication)

(UserPrincipalName=<user>@<domain>)
<user> : user name
<domain> : domain name
Search Attributes
displayName
cn
mail
telephoneNumber
department
Search Start Point

Auto detection of the search starting point
The domain at each level is specified by dc=.

yes
Search Method of Authentication Server

N/A
DNS
Authentication of Domain with Mutual Trust

no
yes
Mail Address Relation

Acquisition of User Mail Address
Use of Mail Address of Equipment
From Format
no
yes
When the user mail address was not able to be acquired.
displayName<mail> or cn<mail>
1-24
Item
Specifications
Network Authentication Settings

Automatic Logout Function Support
Range of Automatic Logout Time
Default Automatic Logout Time
Number of characters that can be input
yes
1-10(minites)
3(minites)
User Name
Password
Domain Name
Windows NT Server
64
28
255
N/A
Active Directory
255
User Authentication
MFP Control Panel
Browser via network
PC-Print
PC-FAX
TWAIN
yes (Log-in on Control Panel)

yes (Log-in on Web Browser)
yes (Security Print)
yes (Log-in on Fax Driver)
no
Optional Kits
Paper supply unit
yes, Universal type
PostScript3 Kit
Barcode/OCR Font
PS3 & Barcode/OCR Font
Mechanical counter
Expandable CF Memory for Network board
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Expandable CF Memory for PCL board (for

PDF Direct Print)
Foreign Device Interface
yes
yes
1-25
2 Machine Composition
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence
2.1.1 Auto Document Feeder (ADF) Section
ADF (Auto Document Feeder) is a device that feeds the document continuously one page by one to
the scanning section automatically. It consists mainly of document tray, Tx cover, inner guide, and
platen cover. When the device is categorized by its functions, it consists of separator section that
picks up each page of documents, and scan section that scans the document.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part name
Press roller
DS2 sensor
Feed roller
Separate roller
Separate pad
Pickup roller
DS1 sensor
Exit roller
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Part name
Mirror A
Mirror C
Mirror A
Lens
Home sensor
Mirror B
CCD
Document insert section / separator section

The machine scans up to A4 paper size document width. Place the document to the center of the
document tray and align the document guide.
By pressing the start key through copy or transmission commands, the motor starts driving, and the
driving force is transferred to the pick up roller through gears, and the document will be fed.
Document separator section consists mainly of separate roller and separate pad.
The document will be fed from the upper pages. Remaining documents are separated by the friction
of the separate pad and only the top page will fed by the separate roller.
Original Detection
The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors;
Detection
Document presence
Action
Detects whether there is a document on
Sensor
DS1
Leading and trailing edge

detection
the tray or not

Detects the leading and trailing edge of
the feeding document
DS2
2-1
Scanning section
The document sensor (DS2) is placed at scanning position to detect the leading edge and trailing
edge of the document.
When the leading edge is detected, the feed roller transfers the document a certain steps where the
scanning begins. When the trailing edge is detected, the feed roller transfers the document a certain
steps where the scanning ends.
If the document has two or more pages, feeding of the next page begins when the former page scanning ends, and the page is scanned in the same way.
The steps where scanning begins can be adjusted with machine parameter 013, and the steps where
scanning ends by machine parameter 014.
2.1.2 Flat Bed Scannser (FBS) section

The FBS (Flat Bed Scanner) section consists of document glass (pane), optical reading section, scanner frame Assy, and scanner driving section.
A lamp (White light LED array) is on the scanner frame, and the light reflected from the document
passes through four mirrors and a lends to form a reduced image on CCD sensor as the scanner
motor moves the scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical
image signal.
Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

During scanning, the scanner frame projects an even amount of light from the exposure lamp onto the
entire surface of the document. The light is reflected from the original to the mirror through the lens to
the CCD. The scanner frame is driven by the FBS motor and scanner drive belts.
The scanner frame driving speed is determined by zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. It is
at home position where ADF scanning begins. The home sensor watches this position.
6
5
4
No.
Part name
1 FBS motor
2 Lamp (LED)
3 Scanner frame
No.
Part name
4 Lens
5 CCD PCB
6 Home sensor
2-2
Exposure Section: Construction and Function
3
1 Reflector tape
The reflector tape reflects the light from the exposure lamp and supplements its illumination.
This helps to lighten the shadow that is made when copying a document not touching the
document glass such as a opened book.
2 Exposure lamp

A white LED array is used to illuminate the document.
3 Mirror A

Directs the reflected light from the document to the lends.
2-3
2.2 Recording Section

Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup
roller. The paper is fed along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller. Then it is fed by the
rotation of the register roller.
At duplex printing, the paper is transferred to the exit when the first side of paper is printed. After a few
steps after the PDS and DPS sensor detect the paper trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and
the paper is transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.
The paper reaches to the image transfer area inside out, and the second side of the paper is printed.
2-4
2.3 Image Processing

The image processing is roughly divide into the following steps:
1. Drum Charging
2. Drum Exposure
3. Development
4. Image transfer
5. Fusing
6. Erasing
7. Cleaning
Drum charging
Fusing
Cleaning
Exposure
Drum
Eraser Lamp
Image transfer
Development
2.3.1 Drum Charge

The Drum is charged with corona discharge before LED exposure. A charge wire and a charge grid
are used for the charging method. The corona discharge generates little ozone in the printer. It also
keeps the wire from becoming dirty. Because the discharge, the Drum can be charged evenly.
2.3.2 Drum Exposure

The light makes an invisible static image from the LED print head.
The LED print head, located inside the printer cover, closes down over the drum and projects light
onto the drum surface. When the document is to be printed, individual elements in the LED print head
turn on and expose the drum wherever a dark area should appear in the document.
2-5
2.3.3 Development
Toner is applied to the invisible static image on the Drum and a toner image is created on the surface.
Toner agitator
Drum
Developing roller
Toner supply roller
1
2
3
4
Part Name
Toner Agitator
Toner supply Roller
Developing Roller
Drum
Function
Agitates toner.
Transports the toner to the developing roller.
Carries the toner to the Drum surface for development.
Exposed by LED light to create an invisible image and
rotates to carry the developed image to the paper surface.
2.3.4 Image Transfer

Image transfer is the process of transferring the toner image created on the Drum in the developing process to paper. In the Roller Image Transfer, there is little generation of ozone due to corona
discharge. Also, there is no blur of toner because the paper is always pressed by the Drum and the
Image Transfer Roller.
Image transfer roller

PC Drum
Hight voltage unit - output
2-6
2.3.5 Erasing
An LED lamp exposes the Drum surface. When it is exposed the drum charge erases. This helps the
drum to be recharged evenly at the next step of charging.
Drum
LED Lamp
2.3.6 Cleaning
The residual toner or paper dust must be removed from the drum. Paper dust is removed from the
drum surface by a rubber roller. And then by a metallic roller, and finally scraped off.
The residual toner is removed by the developing roller and toner supply roller, and is recycled.
Cleaning
Drum
Development
2-7
2.3.7 Fusing
An Overview
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.
A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The toner image is fused by Heater Roller heated
by the Heater Lamp, and securely fixed by the pressure between the Heater roller and Press rollers.
A Thermistor detects and controls the Heater Roller temperature.
The Thermostat functions when the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a
high temperature malfunction.
Press roller
Exit roller
Paper separate blade

Thermistor
Press roller
Heater lamp
Heater roller
2-8
Fusing Temperature Control Circuit

The Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Heater Roller and inputs that analog voltage
into the Main Control PCB. Corresponding to this data, the Heater Lamp ON/OFF signal is output to
the Heater ON/OFF switch of the power supply unit, causing the Heater Lamp to turn ON or OFF to
control the fusing temperature.
When the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature malfunction, the thermostat shuts down the power to the heater lamp. When the thermostat is malfunction, the
thermal cut-off shuts down the power to the heater lamp.
Main Control PCB
Power supply unit
AC Inlet
N
Fusing temperature
control circuit
Heater
on/off switch
Main switch
Fusing unit
Thermistor
Heater Lamp
Thermostat
Thermal cut-off
Fusing temperature
1) Warming Up
After the initialization of the printer, warming up of the printer starts and the
Heater Lamp turns ON until the temperature of the Heater Roller reaches approx. 140 C.
2) Printing
When the printer obtains the printing command from its controller, the Heater
Roller is maintained at 170, 185 or 206 C .
After printing, the printer turns to ready mode. The fuser kept at low temperature.
3) Ready
The Heater Roller maintained at approx. 110 C.
4) Energy save mode In this mode, saving the power.

Temperature
( F)
( C)
206
402
185
365
338
170
230
Post card, envelope, or transparency

Small size paper (A5 and half-letter)
110
Warming up
Printing
Ready mode
Power ON
2-9
Energy save mode
Time
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2.5 Circuit board constructions

PCB MAIN
PCB PDL
PCB IS
PCB NCU
DFX336
MODEM
USB
HOST
PANEL
BW LCD
SPEAKER
Audio
COUNTER
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
MD0021 SYSTEM ASIC

System Bus
SH7203
CPU
FLASH ROM
128MB
SDRAM (*1)
64x2MB
Heater
LAMP
POWER
SUPPLY
SRAM (*2)
1Mb
Lithium battery
MAIN
MOTOR
Motor Driver
DUPLEX
FPGA
LPH I/F
PCI Bus
PCB PANEL
PCB LPH
COMM
Enc./Dec.
RES.CONV
PRINTER
RES.CONV
Layout/Dec.
PCI I/F
DDR SDRAM
CONTROL
+DMAC
SYS DMAC
Ni-MH battery
ADF
UNIT
Motor Driver
ADF
MOTOR
USB Func
(*1) Connected to the Ni-MH battery

(*2) Connected to the Lithium battery
2-15
FBS
MOTOR
Motor Driver
PCB CCD
MD0022 I/F
Color
CCD
IMAGE
DDR 64MBx3
PCB
LED-LAMP
Layout/Enc.
LPH
PCB SCANNER
MD0022
IMAGE
PROCESSING
PROCESSING
PRINTER
UNIT
DDR SDRAM
128MB
AFE
SYS I/F
PCB
CONN
LPH
2.5.1 Main control board

This board controls the MFP system. By inserting the USB memory stick, firmware can be updated.
The main devices mounted on the main control board and their functions are as follows:
CPU
This performs the firmware.

This controls the high voltage power board.
MD0021
This controls the memory.

This controls the scanner motor.
This edits the image such as rotation, mirroring, or n-in-1.
This transfers the serial image date to LPH board.
This performs the USB functions.
Modem
This has G3 and Super G3 communication function.
Memory section
FLASH memory
The FLASH memory stores program data, background level data, and other parameters.
SRAM
The SRAM stores user registered data. Is is backed up by a lithium battery.
The data will be cleared by removing the jumper pin JP2.
SDRAM
The SDRAM is for following use. It is backed up by a Ni-MH battery on the main control board:

1) Stores program data; When the machine is turned on, CPU operation data
is copied from FLASH memory on SDRAM, and then executed from the
SDRAM.

2) Stores encoded image data.

3) Works as temporary communication memory.
USB controller
This controls the USB HOST function.
2.5.2 Scanner board

It detects the FBS sensor signal.
It controls the motor drivers.
It drives the FBS motor.
It controls the CCD.
It offsets the image signal (analogue signal) from the CCD, then adjusts gain, converts AD, and processes the image data.
When MD 0022 has processed color or monochrome image, it codes the data and transmits to the
main control board.
2.5.3 CCD board

This board is mounted with color 600dpi CCD for A4-size.
The CCD device scans the document, and transmits the image data signal (analog signal) to scanner
board.
2.5.4 LPH (LED Printer Head) board / LPH connection board

It detects the printer sensor signal.
It controls the clutches.
It converts the print serial data received from main control board to a data format for the LED head,
then transmits it to the LED.
It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density.
2.5.5 Panel board

This is a key input board that equips 5.7 inch monochrome LCD.
It controls the panel key and LCD touch key.
2.5.6 Network board

This controls the network interface.
It has the Message board function.
2-16
2.5.7 Printer Description Language (PDL) board

This rasterizes print data transmitted from the computer, as the main control board cannot do it.
2.5.8 Low-voltage power board

It consists of four blocks: primary control, secondary control, heater control, and flicker control.
The secondary output voltages are +24.0 VDC, +12.0 VDC, +5.0 VDC, and +3.3 VDC. The +24.0
VDC is for transformer control, +12.0 VDC, +5.0 VDC, and +3.3 VDC are for DC/DC control.
AC inputs is turned off and on by an AC switch at an inlet.
It equips an overvoltage and overcurrent protection circuit.
It equips a heater driving circuit for the fuser.
Output is 750 W / 220 ~ 240VAC.
INLET
OUTPUT CN201
CONTOL
DC/DC +12V
SW
FUSE F1
L
N
LINE FILTER
RECTIFIVATION /
LEVEL
P-CON
HC1
HC2
RECTIFIVATION /
LEVEL
+24. 0V
FUSE F201
FUSE F202
CONTOL
+24V
HEATER
CONTOL 1
CN 101
4
5
6
7
8
9
P- CON
CONTOL IC
FUSE F101
1
2
3
OUTPUT CN202
CONTOL
DC/DC +12V
HEATER
CONTOL 2
OUTPUT HEATER CN101
+12. 0V FUSE F203
CONTOL
DC/DC +5V
+5. 0V
CONTOL
DC/DC +3V
+3. 3V
PC1A
PC2A
PT102
PT101
HC1
1
2
3
7
8
11
12
4
5
6
9
10
13
14
15
HC2
2.5.9 High-voltage power board

This board generates high-voltage power required for electrophotographic system ; charge, developing, transfer, and cleaning sections.
In charging section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the wire in the drum unit in order
to charge the drum surface positive. It monitors the charge condition through the wire condition. Also it
charges the mesh grid electrode at the opening of charger in order to make the drum charge potential
even.
In developing section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the developing roller and supply
roller in the developing unit in order to transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum. The control of output voltage is made by an analogue signal.
In transfer section, it generates negative voltage which is applied to the transfer roller in order to transfer the toner on the drum to paper. The control of output voltage is made by an analogue signal. Also
generates positive voltage when cleaning the transfer roller.
In cleaning section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the cleaning roller and cleaning
shaft in order to collect paper dust on the drum.
2-17
2.5.10 Network Control Unit (NCU) board

The NCU board provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring
signal detector and telephone control circuit.
Major components of the NCU

DP relay
Connects the telephone line to the fax.
S relay
Used to connect the telephone line at seizure state.
OH & Tone detector
Detects the On-hook condition of the Phone 1 and Phone 2.
H relay
Disconnects the Phone 1 and Phone 2 line from PSTN.
24V generator
Supplies 24 volts to the relays for OH detection of Phone 1 or Phone 2.
Ring signal detector
A photo coupler that detects an incoming ring.
2-18
2.6 Sensors
2.6.1 Sensor Locations
The following illustration shows the relative positions of the machines sensors.
HS
PES1
TS2
TS1
JAMC2
OPEN2
PES2
APS
DS1
DS2
TXIL
COVER-SW
PDS
DPS
JAMC1
PSS
Thermistor
OPEN1
TRAYS
2-19
2.6.2 Sensor Descriptions

The following table gives a brief description of each sensor and its function.
Code
Name
Detects
DS1
Document sensor 1
Presence of document in feeder
DS2
Document sensor 2
Leading and trailing edge of
document
APS
ADF permit sensor
Platen cover quite close or not
HS
Mirror carriage home
Mirror carriage position
position sensor
TXIL
Interlock switch
Scanner cover open or close
COVER
Cover switch
Detects front cover and the first
cassette jam access cover are
open or close
PDS
Paper discharge sensor Detects paper pass at paper exit
DPS
Duplex paper sensor
Detects paper pass of the duplex
printing paper
OPEN1
Paper cassette open
Detects the first paper cassette
sensor
open or close
PES1
Paper empty sensor
Detects presence of recording
paper in the first paper
cassette
TS1
Toner sensor 1
Detects the toner empty for small
capacity toner cartridge
TS2
Toner sensor
Detects the toner empty for large
capacity toner cartridge
PSS
Paper supply sensor
Detects paper feeding out of cassette/tray
TRAYS
Tray sensor
paper in the bypass tray
JAMC1
Jam access cover sen- Detects the side cover open or
sor
close
PES2
Paper empty sensor
OPEN2
Paper cassette open

sensor
Jam access cover
sensor
JAMC2

paper in the 2nd paper cassette
Detects the 2nd paper cassette
open or close
Detects the 2nd paper cassette
side cover open or close
2-20
Sensor Type
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Mechanical Switch
Mechanical Switch
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
2.7 Function detail and additional information

2.7.1 Port setting list
Application
Detail
Info Monitor
New arrival notification to

InfoMonitor
New arrival inquiry from
InfoMonitor
User list acquisition / User
authentication
Cover page list acquisition
Cover page data upload
Printer registration on MFP
CoverPage Editor
Scan to Print
Monitor
TWAIN driver
(Network)
Installer
GDI print driver
PCL print driver
PS print driver
XPS print driver
FAX driver
Documen list data

acquisition
Image data download from
MFP
Test printing for Security
Print function
Print data transfer to MFP
Port name
Protocol
Original
UDP/IP
Standard port Application

number
role
61000
Receive
HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP
80/443
Send
HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP
80/443
Send
HTTP
TCP/IP
HTTP
TCP/IP
HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP
80
80
80/443
Send
Send
Send
HTTP
TCP/IP
80
Send
HTTP
TCP/IP
80
Send
LPR
TCP/IP
515
Send
IPP Port
Standard
TCP/IP Port
IPP
Raw
LPR
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
80
9100
515
Send
Send
Send
Standard
TCP/IP Port
Raw
LPR
HTTP
HTTP
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
9100
515
80
80
Send
Send
Send
Send
LPR
TCP/IP
515
Send
HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP
80/443
Send
Original
61000
Send/
Receive
Cover page list acquisition

FAX location acquisition /
designation
PDF Direct Print

XPS Direct Print
Used in common
User list acquisition / User
by print driver, Fax authentication
driver, and installer
Server (MFP) search
Used in common
by InfoMonitor,
CoverPage Editor,
Scan to Print
Monitor, TWAIN
driver and installer
2-21
UDP/IP
3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The fax machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below
along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description.
When you press * , you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is no problem.
Service Program
Explanation
Operation
Page
Machine Parameters Used to set or clear machine parameters.
<Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0> 3-3
Memory Switch
Used to set or clear memory switches
<Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1> 3-19
User data settings
This mode clears user programmed informa- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2> 3-74
tion.
All RAM clear
This mode clears all backup data to initialize <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3> 3-74
the machine.
Unique Switches
These switches are used to program internal <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <4> 3-49
machine parameters.
T30 Monitor
The communications on the journal list are <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5> 3-75
able to print.
Printer maintenance Shows the error code for "Checkout error"
<Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6> 3-78
mode
errors.
Service Report Print- You can print out a report that contains ma- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <7> 3-81
ing
chines usage and error history.
Monitor speaker
If you need to monitor the signal of fax com- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8> 3-86
munication, turn this mode on.
<Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> 3-86
Test Modes
This mode offers the ability to print a test
pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included are followings.
1. Life monitor
2. Printer test
3. Feeder test
4. Set background level
5. Make Color Gamma
6. Select Color Gamma
Print parameter
This function instructs the unit to print a list <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0> 3-92
settings
of the machine parameter, memory switch
and unique switch settings.
Factory functions
Allows to perform a series of diagnostic
<Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1> 3-92
tests:
1. LED test
2. LCD test
3. Panel test
4. SRAM check
5. DRAM check
6. RTC test
7. Page memory check
8. Pseudo ring test
9. Serial number writing
Line tests
This mode offers several internal tests and <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2> 3-97
ability to monitor certain unit output functions.
1. Relay test
2. Tonal signal test
3. DTMF output test
Mirror carriage trans- This mode moves the mirror carriage to the <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> 3-100
fer mode
transport position.
Consumable order
Used to set or clear the consumable order
<Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5> 3-101
sheet.
sheet
DRAM clear
This clears the image storage memory.
<Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6> 3-107
3-1
Service Program
Life monitor
maintenance
Sensor input test
Explanation
Operation
Use this mode to clear the resettable counter <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>
or reenter the life monitor.
This mode enables to confirm the sensor
<Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2>
status.
Printer diagnostic
This mode enables to confirm the operation <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3>
mode
of the printer parts.
Network service mode Used to clear administrator's password andi <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>
initialize authentication method.
Flash ROM Sum
This mode enables to check Sum after the <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9>
check
Flash ROM version is updated.
Set service report
Used to enter location where to send the ser- <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2>
vice report.
Printer registration
This mode adjusts the print position.
<Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3>
adjustment
Reset printer trouble This mode clears the service call. Clear the <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <5>
warning when the trouble is settled.
Cleaning mode
This mode rotate the Pickup roller and reg- <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <6>
istration roller automatically so that you can
clean the surface of them.
Key Counter
If you have attached the key counter to the <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <0>
machine activate this mode to let it count the
printed-paper.
Network switch mode Adjust the network parameter.
<Setting>, <*>, <5>, <1>
Touch Panel Adjust- Correct the X, Y on the touch panel.
<Setting>, <*>, <5>, <6>
ment
Printer control param- Adjust functions of print controller.
<Setting>, <*>, <5>, <7>
eter mode
Network Capture
You can capture the packet data the ma<Setting>, <*>, <5>, <8>
chine has sent and received, and download
it from the web browser or sent it to an e-mail
address.
Storage Maintenance This mode is used to erase or initialize the
<Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>
Compact Flash (CF) memory card on Message Board.
Service function menu All the field service program modes are avail- <Setting>, <*>, <7>, <7>
able from the menu.
Wire cleaning warning This mode makes to display the cleaning
<Setting>, <*>, <8>, <6>
warning for drum charge wire an print head
in a certain interval.
Installing language
You can install, edit or delete languages on <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <1>
the machine that is prepared in and USB
memory.
Counter Information This mode is used to correct the counter
<Setting>, <*>, <9>, <3>
Maintenance
data on SRAM (main control panel) and CF
memory card.
Update the software Update main ROM, optional print controller <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>
ROM and network board ROM using this
mode.
Quick initial settings You can do the following setting with continu- <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9>
ously:
1. Initial settings
2. Consumable order sheet
3-2
Page
3-107
3-109
3-110
3-111
3-112
3-112
3-114
3-115
3-115
3-116
3-116
3-120
3-120
3-123
3-126
3-127
3-127
3-127
3-128
3-129
3-129
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment

3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>.
2. Press [Edit Parameters].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
Press [ ] or [ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor.
Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ], to change the bit value.
Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen.
Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen.
You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.
The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing [List Parameter].
3-3
3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters

Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults.
2. Press [Clear Parameters].
3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.
Adjustable items :
Adujstment
Parameter
Image data output level (Data attenuation)
001
ADF Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal direction)

ADF Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal direction)
ADF Elastic rate adjustment (Vertical direction)
ADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction)
ADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction)
FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal direction)
FBS Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal direction)
FBS Elastic rate adjustment (Vertical direction)
FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
Mirror carriage standby position adjustment

Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment
Background level adjustment position
020
021
025
Additional steps for fax scanning

ADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction)
FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction)
ADF/RADF(front side) Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction)
043
045
046
Protect duplex printing for cassette 1 / cassette 2/ bypass tray / duplex unit
092
Loop volume adjustment (Cassette 1)

Loop volume adjustment (Cassette 2)
Loop volume adjustment (Bypass tray)
Loop volume adjustment (Duplex unit)
260
261
267
268
Current adjustment (A5 size plain paper)

Current adjustment (Envelop)
Current adjustment (Postcard)
Current adjustment (A4 and F4 plain paper - front side)
Current adjustment (OHP)
Current adjustment (A4 and F4 plain paper - back side)
280
281
282
285
288
289
3-4
Machine Parameter 000 Factory use only

Machine Parameter 001
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Adjust the attenuation level for image data signal output.

bit
3
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
:
Image data output level
(Data attenuation)
0
Memory switch 11 is active

Do not set
-8.0 dB
-9.0 dB
-10.0 dB
-11.0 dB
-12.0 dB
-13.0 dB
-14.0 dB
-15.0 dB
Machine Parameter 002 ~ 009 Factory use only

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
ADF scanner registration

adjustment (Horizontal)
Adjusts the start point to
scan the document.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
(0.2117 mm)
3-5
bit
25 steps

-25 steps
76543210
00011001
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10011001
+5.29 mm
+3.39 mm
+1.69 mm
0 mm Standard
-1.69 mm
-3.39 mm
-5.29 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of the scanning

stretching and squeezing for
ADF.
(Horizontal)
Switch 76543210 Settings
The plus setting stretches the

image data and the
minus setting squeezes it.
Each setting changes by
0.01%
bit

76543210
01111111
:
00010000
:
00000100
:
00000000
:
10000100
:
10010000
:
11111111
+1.27%
+0.16%
+0.04%
0%
Standard
-0.04%
-0.16%
-1.27%

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

ADF.
(Vertical)

bit

The plus setting squeezes

the image data and the
minus setting stretches it.
0.01%
3-6
76543210
01111111
:
00010000
:
00000100
:
00000000
:
10000100
:
10010000
:
11111111
+1.27%
+0.16%
+0.04%
0%
-0.04%
-0.16%
-1.27%
Standard

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Leading edge document

margin adjustment (ADF)

127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000 15.6 mm

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:

100111111 -5.34 mm

:
-127steps
11111111
-10.76 mm
Adjusts the leading edge

margin from Document
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start
of scanning the position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter

043 to this adjustment.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Trailing edge document


127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:
00010011 +0.93 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000 15.6 mm

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
Adjusts document feed after

the trailing edge of a document passes Document
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)

3-7

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
FBS scanner registration

adjustment (Horizontal)
Adjusts the start point to

scan the document.
the left margin and the minus
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000
0 mm

:

10000010 -0.17 mm

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

FBS.
(Horizontal)

bit

The plus setting stretches

minus setting squeezes it.
0.1%
3-8
76543210
01111111
:
00010000
:
00000100
:
00000000
:
10000100
:
10010000
:
11111111
+1.27%
+0.16%
+0.04%
0%
-0.04%
-0.16%
-1.27%
Standard

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

FBS.
(Vertical)

bit

The plus setting squeezes

minus setting stretches it.
0.01%
76543210
01111111
:
00010000
:
00000100
:
00000000
:
10000100
:
10010000
:
11111111
+1.27%
+0.16%
+0.04%
0%
Standard
-0.04%
-0.16%
-1.27%

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

margin adjustment For FBS

127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000
0 mm

:

10000010 -0.17 mm Initial setting

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

margin after Home Sensor
OFF to the start of scanning
the position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)

3-9

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Mirror carriage standby

position adjustment

127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000
0 mm

:


:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
Adjusts the number of the

steps from the home sensor
of the mirror carriage OFF
to the standby position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
After the adjustment, please adjust machine

parameter 013 and 014.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Mirror carriage transfer mode

position adjustment
to the transfer mode position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)

127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000
0 mm

:


:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
Machine Parameter 022 ~ 024 --- Factory use only
3-10

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Background level adjustment

starting position
to the background level
adjusting start position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)

127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000 default position (15.35mm)

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
margin from Document
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start
of scanning the position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Additional steps for
FAX mode
Usage/Comments
127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000 15.6 mm

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:

100111111 -5.34 mm

:
-127steps
11111111
-10.76 mm
Add this value to machine parameter 013. This
adjustment is for fax mode only.

3-11

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

margin adjustment For FBS

margin after Home Sensor
OFF to the start of scanning
the position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Additional steps for FAX
mode
127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000
0 mm

:


:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Trailing edge document

Adjusts document feed after

the trailing edge of a document passes Document
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Additional steps for
FAX mode
127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm

:

00100000 +2.71 mm

:

00010000 +1.36 mm

:
00010011 +0.93 mm

:

00001000 +0.68mm

:

00000000 15.6 mm

:

10001000 -0.68 mm

:

10010000 -1.36 mm

:

10100000 -2.71 mm

:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-12
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Able to use the bypass tray

for duplex printing
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Able to use the second cassette for duplex printing
0: Yes
1: No
Able to use the first cassette
for duplex printing
0: Yes
1: No
When set to 1, the cassette or the bypass tray is

not available for duplex printing.
3-13

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Cassette 1 loop volume
0
Usage/Comments
Adjust the loop at the synchronizing roller.
More loop will correct paper skew, but thin paper may
jam easily.
Adjust it one step at a time.
bit

43210
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
+5.0 mm
+4.2 mm
+3.4 mm
+1.7 mm
+ 0.8 mm
No adjustment (default)
Switch bit 7 to 1 to reduce (minus) the volume.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Cassette 2 loop volume
0
Usage/Comments
jam easily.
bit

43210
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
+5.0 mm
+4.2 mm
+3.4 mm
+1.7 mm
+ 0.8 mm
3-14

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bypass tray loop volume
0
Usage/Comments
jam easily.
bit

43210
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
+5.0 mm
+4.2 mm
+3.4 mm
+1.7 mm
+ 0.8 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Duplex document loop volume
0
Usage/Comments
jam easily.
bit

43210
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
+5.0 mm
+4.2 mm
+3.4 mm
+1.7 mm
+ 0.8 mm
3-15

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment
A5 size
Plain paper

the current and the minus
0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this parameter.
Switch
76543210 Settings
31 steps

8 steps

-1 steps
-2 steps

-8 steps

-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
0 mA Initial setting
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example,

10000001 means -0.11 mA.
NOTE
Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps
at first.
DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment
Envelops

0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this
parameter.
Switch
76543210 Settings
31 steps

8 steps

-1 steps
-2 steps

-8 steps

-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA

10000001 means -0.11 mA.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.
3-16

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment
Postcards

0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this
parameter.
Switch
76543210 Settings
31 steps

8 steps

-1 steps
-2 steps

-8 steps

-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA

10000001 means -0.11 mA.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment
A4 and F4 size
Plain paper front side

0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210 Settings
31 steps

8 steps

-1 steps
-2 steps

-8 steps

-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA

10000001 means -0.11 mA.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.
3-17

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Current adjustment
Transparency sheets (OHP)

0.11 mA.
When transfer problems occur, adjust

this parameter.
Switch
76543210 Settings
31 steps

8 steps

-1 steps
-2 steps

-8 steps

-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA

10000001 means -0.11 mA.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment
A4 and F4 size
Plain paper back side

0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210 Settings
31 steps

8 steps

-1 steps
-2 steps

-8 steps

-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA

10000001 means -0.11 mA.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.
3-18
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment

3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power are lost.
2. Press [Mem Switch Edit].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing
or
, or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings:

Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor.
Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ] to change the bit value.
Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory
switch edit screen.
Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.
6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List.
The memory switch List will be printed by pressing [Mem Switch Print].
3-19
3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches

Resets the memory switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>.
2. Press [Mem Switch Clear].
3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.
Adjustable items :
000
001
002
004
005
010
011
012
013
015
016
017
020
021
CED detection condition

DIS detect time after dialing
CED detection
Phone line type for the first phone line
DIS detection condition
PBX mode dial pause
Redial in D.0.7 error
DTMF attenuation
Ring signal detect time
Number of CI signal detection in Fax / Tel Ready mode
Dual ring detection
Long ring detection
Frequency of the CI signal
Busy tone detection
Fallback pattern
Overseas mode
V. 29 Echo Protect tone
Maximum transmit speed
Time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
Interval between DCS and TCF
Output attenuation
TTI clock type
TTI calendor type
TTI transmit
ECM response time
ECM error retransmit time
Interval between DIS and DCS
ANSam detection
V. 34 transmission
CSI / TSI / CIG transmit
ECM mode
Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN / PIN signals
Program individual autodialer attributes
Sending RTC signal when transmission is canceled
Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs
Action after EOR signal
Additional data on TTI transmit
Subscriber ID transmit
TTI (name) transmit
Time between ANSam output and CM output
Check only manually entered fax numbers in ID check transmission
Data error rate
Pause one second after sending CED
Time between ANSam output and DIS output
Receive speed
DIS "inch" declaration
T1 timer
Print image data when post message is not received after receiving
RTC signal
DIS / DTC Extend field Transmit
G3 echo receive
3-20
023
030
031
032
033
040
051
052
060
061
062
064
065
070
071
072
076
097
098
V .34 reception
Action at time-out in Fax / tel ready mode
Calling period in Fax / Tel reception mode
Number of HDLC end flags
Digital cable equalizer
Tone detection level
EYE-Q check level at 7200 bps
EYE-Q slice level
Check EYE-Q
Delete receive echo of CFR at the receiver side
Expand FSK receive time after detecting flag
Document length limitation
Error line replacement
Add remote fax mark to the journal report
Name printing priority on journal report
CML relay off time after dialing
DTMF tones heard through handset
Off-hook / on-hook detect time
CNG detect in Ans / Fax read
Switch-hook time
CNG detect period after TAD begins recording ICM
CNG detect period after TAD answers
Adjustment of CI detect time
Beep if fax handset is hanged up
Display error line
Tonal line monitor
Print check message if power is lost
Print page if error occurs during memory transmission
Print check message
Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when
the result is NG
Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when
the result is OK
Print T.30 monitor at communication error
Print T.30 monitor
Display modem speed
Erase polled document
Timing to turn off the S-Relay at fax reception
Display when there is no TTI
Day light saving time (Summer time) start month
Day light saving time (Summer time) start week
Day light saving time (Summer time) end month
Day light saving time (Summer time) end week
3-21
Memory switch 00x : Dialer

Memory switch 000 :
bit
7
6
5
4
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
CED detection condition
0
1
0
0
0
DIS detect time after dialing

0 : 55 sec
1 : 70 sec
CED detection
0 : No
1 : Yes
Factory use only
Phone line type for the first
phone line
0 : PSTN
1 : PBX
Usage / Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict not.

Switch 5

4
Normal
Strict
350 ms 500 ms 700 ms 1000 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Sets the DIS signal is detected after dialing a number.

Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on the telephone
line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED signal.
When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial tone and
acts according to the setting of memory switch 000, bit "1" .
When set to PBX, the machine always dials a given number
of seconds after going off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the
number of seconds.
3-22

Memory switch 001 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
DIS detection condition
0
0
1
0
0
PBX mode dial pause
Usage / Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.

Switch 5

4
Normal
Strict
200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Sets the number of seconds the machine waits before dialing

when memory switch 000, bit 0 is set to PBX mode.
Switch

3210
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Pause time
0 sec
1 sec
2 sec
3 sec
4 sec Initial setting
5 sec
6 sec
7 sec
8 sec
9 sec
10 sec
11 sec
12 sec
13 sec
14 sec
15 sec
Memory switch 002 :

bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Redial in D.0.7 error
0 : Yes
1 : No
Usage / Comments
When set to 1 , the machine does not redial in D.0.7 error

(Incoming detection time over).
Memory switch 003 : Factory use only
3-23

Memory switch 004 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
DTMF attenuation
See table below.

The setting of this switch is available only when setting other
than 0.
Memory Switch 004 : DTMF attenuation
Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
3-24
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0

Memory switch 005 :
bit
7
6
5
4
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
1
Ring signal detect time
1
0
Number of CI signal detection in Fax / Tel Ready

mode
0 : Detect 1 time
1 : Detect 2 times
Dual ring detection
Long ring detection
0 : No
1 : Yes
Frequency of the CI signal
0 : No
1 : Yes
Usage / Comments
Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected after
hanging up. (Fax / Tel Ready mode only.)
Switch

654
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms
600 ms
700 ms
800 ms
Select the number of detection time of CI signal in the Fax /

Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode.
Incoming calls are answered according to this setting regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User Settings.
When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer an incoming ring with an off time of 120-60 ms.
Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring if the ring
on time is longer than two seconds.
When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of the incoming CI signal.
Memory switch 006~ 009 : Factory use only
3-25
Memory switch 01x : Transmission

Memory switch 010 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
1
Busy tone detection
Set this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit is mistaken
0 : No
for a busy signal.
1 : Yes
0
Fallback pattern (bps)

2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400
Set at 0 :
2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1 :
4 times 1 time 1 time 1 time 1 time 1 time
0
Overseas mode
Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by the CED
0 : No
signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS signal and
1 : Yes
transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal.
0
V. 29 Echo Protect tone
International telephone lines equipped with echo suppression
0 : No
will cut the beginning portion of the transmitted information
1 : Yes
which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and
data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using
G3 high-speed modem training (V. 29).
1
Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
1
0
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
1
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Memory switch 011 :

bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
0
The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
1
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data
transmission using this switch.
0
0
0
1
1
1

250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
Switch 7
0
0
1
1
Switch 6
0
1
0
1
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval
between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.

75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms
Switch 5
0
0
1
1
Switch 4
0
1
0
1
Output attenuation
See table below
Memory Switch 011 : Output attenuation
Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
3-26
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0

Memory switch 012 :
bit
7
6
5
Initial
Adjust
Setting
1
TTI clock type
0 : AM PM clock
1 : 24 hour clock
1
TTI calendor type
1
TTI transmit
0 : No
1 : Yes
NOTE
1
0
0
0
Usage / Comments
bit

65
1 1
1 0
0 1
dd mm yyyy (default)
mm dd yyyy
yyyy/mm/dd
When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI

includes the followings:
Sender name
Senders fax number
Data & time, and number of pages
To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW
016.
Turning TTI
transmission off may
violate local or federal
regulations.)
ECM response time
The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post
0 : 3 sec
message.
1 : 4.8 sec
ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0 : 200 ms
1 : 400 ms

0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms
Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1
Memory switch 013 :

bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
ANSam detection
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
V. 34 transmission
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
ECM mode
0 : On
1 : Off
0
Retransmit automatically
when receiving RTN / PIN
signals
0 : Yes
1 : No
1
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
Usage / Comments
During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the
handshake and an error occurs, set to 1.
Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and CIG signals
are disabled.
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times.
When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN / PIN signals.

3-27

Memory switch 015 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Program individual autodialer attributes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Sending RTC signal when
transmission is canceled
0 : Yes
1 : No
Usage / Comments
Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as attribute

1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and 013 as attribute 4
when fax destination are programmed. (Refer to page 3-45 for
settings.)
RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission.

When set at 0, the machine will send the RTC if the transmission is canceled. No error will occur.
When set at 1, an error will occur because RTC will not be
sent at the end of a canceled transmission.
Cancel redial if T.4.1 or When set at 0, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the machine
T.4.4 error occurs
will not retry the transmission.
0 : Yes
1 : No
Action after EOR signal
Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400 bps.
0 : Continue
1 : Discontinue
Memory switch 016 :

bit
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
A d d i t i o n a l d a t a o n T T I When set at 0, the transmission of the additional data (time,

transmit
the number of pages, file number, etc) is disabled.
0 : No
1 : Yes
NOTE
Subscriber ID transmit
0 : No
1 : Yes
TTI (name) transmit

0 : No
1 : Yes
Factory use only
This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit

4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available.
When set at 0, the transmission of the subscriber ID is
disabled.
NOTE
When set at 0, the transmission of the name which was
stored in the unit is disabled.
NOTE
3-28

Memory switch 017 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Time between ANSam out- When using optical communication line, wait to make sure that
the terminal adopter has turned the echo-canceler off.
put and CM output
Waiting too long may fail the receiver to catch the CM and go
to V 17 procedures.
This setting is needed only for optical communication line.
bit

321
111
110
101
100
011
010
001
000
1750 msec
1500 msec
1250 msec
1000 msec
750 msec
500 msec
250 msec
Refers the time set on the modem
Check only manually en- When set at 1 , the ID check transmission will check only the
tered fax numbers in ID manually entered fax numbers and not check the number entered using the address book.
check transmission
0 : No
1 : Yes
Memory switch 018 ~ 019 : Factory use only
3-29
Memory switch 02x : Reception

Memory switch 020 :
bit
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
0
Data error rate
Determines the allowable number of erred lines out of total
0 : 10%
lines received in a document.
1 : 20%
0
Pause one second after A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression in some
sending CED
telephone equipment. When set to "1", the machine pauses
0 : No (75 ms)
one second after sending CED, which allows echo suppres1 : Yes (1 sec)
sion to restart. This may help with problematic overseas reception.
1
Time between ANSam out- This setting is for optical communication line.
put and DIS output
Adjust the time between ANSam output completion and DIS
0 : 75msec.
output start. (When V.8 procedure dose not start by output
1 : 450msec.
ANSam, it moves to V.8 procedure by output DIS)
Terminal adopter turns the echo-canceler off and then on within 400 ms during the silent time.
Use this adjustment to make sure that the echo-canceler is
turned on again, when the communication procedure has
moved from V.34 to T.30.
0
Factory use only
1
Receive speed (kbps)
1
Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines.
0
1
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
3-30
Memory switch 02x : Reception

Memory switch 021 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
0
Factory use only
0
DIS "inch" declaration
0 : No
1 : Yes
1
Factory use only
0
T1 timer
Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials the remote
0 : 35 sec
machines phone number, it begins sending CNG and waits
1 : 20 sec
this amount of time before disconnecting the line.
1
Print image data when post If the received document includes the RTC, the machine prints
message is not received the data even though the following protocol is not succeeded.
after receiving RTC signal
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
DIS / DTC Extend field Setting this switch to "1" will disable ITU-T superfine mode.
Transmit
0 : Yes
1 : No (Tx until Bit No.24 of
DIS / DTC)
0
G3 echo receive
1
Adjusts the delay between detection of training / TCF and sending of CFR.

Switch 1
Switch 0
100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms

0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

Memory switch 023 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
0
V .34 reception
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
1
Action at time-out in Fax /
tel ready mode
0 : Hang up
1 : Receive fax
0
Calling period in Fax / Tel
0
reception mode
0
Usage / Comments
Individual setting for V.34 reception.
Set this switch to 1, to receive fax when time-over occurs in

Fax / tel ready mode.
Defines the calling period in Fax / Tel reception mode.
bit

210
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Memory switch 024~029 : Factory use only

3-31
30 seconds
40 seconds
50 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
180 seconds
300 seconds
Initial setting
Memory switch 03x : Modem

Memory switch 030 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
0
Number of HDLC end flags Defines the number of HDLC end flags.
0
1

Switch 7654
0

0000 1

0001 2

0010 3
Initial setting

0011 4

0100 5

0101 6

0110 7

0111 8

1000 9

1001 10

1010 11

1011 12

1100 13

1101 14

1110 15

1111 16
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Digital cable equalizer
When set to 1, become efficient for the line short break,
0 : Free
but become weak for the line noise. Its available only for
communication at 14,400 or 12,000 bit/s.
1 : Hold
When set to 1, detection level goes up but it becomes noise0
Tone detection level
sensitive.
0 : -43 dBm
Adjust CED (2100 Hz) detection level in Unique switch 035.
1 : -48 dBm
Memory switch 031 :

bit
7
6
Initial
Adjust
Setting
1
EYE-Q check level at
0
7200 bps
5
4
1
0

9600 bps
3
2
1
0

12000 bps
1
0
1
0

14400 bps
Usage / Comments
0 0 1 1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
3-32
Memory switch 03x : Modem

Memory switch 032 :
bit
7
6
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
EYE-Q slice level
0 : Disable
1 : Enable
1
Check EYE-Q
0 : No
1 : Yes
5
4
3
2
0
0
1
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
2400 bps
1
0
1
0

4800 bps
Usage / Comments
Setting this bit to 1 enables memory switch 032, bits 0-3
and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and enables EYE-Q check
adjustment.
Set at 0 : Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not checked after
checking TCF.
Set at 1 : Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked after
checking TCF.
0 0 1 1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
Memory switch 033 :
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
bit
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Delete receive echo of CFR
at the receiver side
0 : No
1 : Yes
Expand FSK receive time
after detecting flag
0 : 3.3 seconds
1 : 10 seconds
Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode.

Sets this switch to 1 to resolve the problem caused of the
echo of CFR.
Setting this switch to 1 extend HDLC frame receive timer
in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after detecting preamble.
3-33
Memory switch 04x : Scanner

Memory switch 040 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Document length limit
Memory
Switch 40 -0
0
Usage / Comments
Setting to unlimited will override document jam sensing. See

the table below.
Mode
COPY
FAX
SCAN
COPY
FAX
SCAN
(mm)
500
500
900
1,500
1,500
1,500
500
500
500
900
900
900
Ultra-fine
Hyper-fine
Super-fine
Fine
Normal
Ultra-fine
Hyper-fine
Super-fine
Fine
Normal
3-34
Memory switch 05x : Printer

Memory switch 051 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
When an error line is caused, the line will be replaced to the

Error line replacement
0:R
eplace to the former designated line.
line
1 : Replace to a white line
Memory switch 052

bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Add remote fax mark to the
journal report
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
Name printing priority on
0
journal report
0
0
0
43210
00000
00001
00100
00111
01010
10011
10101
First priority
Address Book Entry
Subscriber ID
Address Book Entry
Address Book Number
Address Book Number
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Usage / Comments
Set this function to 1 to print an R on the journal report

when the location name is acquired from the remote fax
machine.
Select name printing priority.
Refer table below.
Second priority
Address Book Number
Address Book Number
Subscriber ID
Address Book Entry
Subscriber ID
Address Book Entry
Address Book Number
3-35
Third priority
Subscriber ID
Address Book Number
Subscriber ID
Address Book Entry
Address Book Number
Address Book Entry
Memory switch 06x : Remote reception

Memory switch 060 :
bit
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
1
CML relay off time after
dialing
0 : 1 sec
1 : 200 ms
0
DTMF tones heard through
handset
0 : No
1 : Yes
1
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
Usage / Comments
When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise may occur as
the CML relay switches on and off.
Set this switch to 0 to avoid this.
Determines if DTMF tones are produced through the handset
in off-hook dialing.
Memory switch 061 :

bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Off-hook / on-hook detect
time
Usage / Comments
Sets the time interval between the on-hook and off-hook (or
off-hook/on-hook) condition.
Switch 3210 Time

0000 0 ms

0001 100 ms

0010 200 ms

0011 300 ms

0100 400 ms
Initial setting

0101 500 ms

0110 600 ms

0111 700 ms

1000 800 ms

1001 900 ms

1010 1000 ms

1011 1100 ms

1100 1200 ms

1101 1300 ms

1110 1400 ms

1111 1500 ms
3-36

Memory switch 062 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
bit
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
CNG detect in Ans / Fax When set to 1, the machine detects the CNG signal in Ans /
ready
Fax ready.
0 : No
1 : Yes
Switch-hook time
If the switch hook is quickly depressed and released, switchto-fax will occur. This setting adjusts how quickly the switch
hook activation must be.
Switch

3210
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3-37
Time
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms
600 ms
700 ms
800 ms
900 ms
1000 ms
1100 ms
1200 ms
1300 ms
1400 ms
1500 ms
Initial setting

Memory switch 064 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
0
CNG detect period after Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD
0
TAD begins recording ICM begins recording incoming message.
1
1
Switch 7654 Time

0000 0 sec

0001 10 sec

0010 20 sec

0011 30 sec
Initial setting

0100 40 sec

0101 50 sec

0110 60 sec

0111 70 sec

1000 80 sec

1001 90 sec

1010 100 sec

1011 110 sec

1100 120 sec

1101 130 sec

1110 140 sec

1111 150 sec
0
CNG detect period after Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD
0
answers an incoming call.
TAD answers
0
1
Switch 3210 Time

0000 0 sec

0001 10 sec
Initial setting

0010 20 sec

0011 30 sec

0100 40 sec

0101 50 sec

0110 60 sec

0111 70 sec

1000 80 sec

1001 90 sec

1010 100 sec

1011 110 sec

1100 120 sec

1101 130 sec

1110 140 sec

1111 150 sec
Incoming rings
TAD plays Outgoing message
TAD records Incoming message
CNG detection is active
CNG detection is active
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 0-3)
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 4-7)
3-38

Memory switch 065 :
Initial
Setting
0
bit
Adjust
Adjustment of CI detect
time
Usage / Comments
Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI detect time.
Switch

76543
11111
11101
:
01001
00111
00101
00011
00000
00010
00100
00110
01000
:
11100
11110
Time
150 msec
140 msec
:
40 msec
30 msec
20 msec
10 msec
0 msec
-10 msec
-20 msec
-30 msec
-40 msec
:
-140 msec
-150 msec
Initial setting
Factory use only
Factory use only
Beep if fax handset is

hanged up
0 : Yes
1 : No
Determines if your machine beeps when having left the faxs

handset hanging up after communication.
3-39
Memory switch 07x : Operation

Memory switch 070 :
bit
7
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Display error line
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
Tonal line monitor
Usage / Comments
The number of error lines contained in the received
data will be shown in the LCD.
Allows fax communication to be heard through the
monitor speaker.
bit

65
1 0
0 1
0 0
ON
Monitor until DIS outputs
OFF
Factory use only
Print check message if

power is lost
0 : No
1 : Yes
Print page if error occurs For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for
during memory transmis- memory transmission will print along a check message if an
error occurs during memory transmission.
sion
0 : No
1 : Yes
Print check message

0 : No
1 : Yes
Factory use only
If the machine could not hold the memory in an event of power

losses, documents will be lost. When power is restored, a
check message will print.
To notify the user of an error, a check message can be printed

if a communication error occurs.
3-40

Memory switch 071 :
bit
7
6
5
4
3
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
1
Print TCR with the original
page during memory transmission when the result is
NG
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
Factory use only
1
Print TCR with the original
page during memory transmission when the result is
OK
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
Print T.30 monitor at communication error
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
Print T.30 monitor
0
Display modem speed

0 : No
1 : Yes
Usage / Comments
For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for

memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is NG.
For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for

memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is OK.
Set this switch to 1 to print out T.30 monitor automatically at

communication error.
Set this switch to 1 to print out T.30 monitor by each communication.
The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
Memory switch 071 Print TCR with the original page
Switch 3
Switch 5
When Memory transmission was OK,
When Memory transmission was NG,
When all broadcast transmissions were OK,
When some broadcast transmissions were NG,
0
0
No
No
No
No
1
1
No
Yes
No
Yes
0
Yes
No
Yes
No
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memory switch 072 :
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
bit
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Erase polled document
0 : No
1 : Yes
Factory use only
Usage / Comments
Determines if a document stored for polling is erased after

being polled.
3-41

Memory switch 076 :
bit
7
6
5
4
Initial
Adjust
Usage / Comments
Setting
0
Timing to turn off the S- Adjust this setting when a private exchanger disconnects the
0
line when S-Relay is turned off.
Relay at fax reception.
0
Bit
7654
time
0

1111
1500 seconds

1110
1400 seconds

:
:

1010
1000 seconds

1001
900 seconds

0100
800 seconds

:
:

0100
500 seconds

0100
400 seconds

0011
300 seconds

0010
200 seconds

0001
100 seconds

0000
10 seconds (default)
2
1
0
0
1
0
Display when there is no

TTI
0 : No
1 : Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only

Memory switch 08x : Not used
3-42
Memory switch 09x : Miscellaneous

Memory switch 097 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
(Summer time) start month

(Summer time) start week
Usage/Comments
This switch sets the month when the day light saving
time (summer time) begins.
Switch 7 6 5 4 Time

0000
March

0001
January

0010
February

0011
March (Initial setting)

0100
April

0101
May

0110
June

0111
July

1000
August

1001
September

1010
October

1 0 1 1 November

1100
December
This switch sets on which week when the day light
saving time (summer time) begins.
Start day light saving from Sunday 1:00
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 of the last week

0 0 0 1 of the first week

0 0 1 0 of the second week

0 0 1 1 of the third week

0 1 0 0 of the fourth week

0 1 0 1 of the last week of the month (
initial)
3-43
Memory switch 09x : Miscellaneous

Memory switch 098 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
1
0
1
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
(Summer time) end month

(Summer time) end week
Usage/Comments
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends.
Switch 7 6 5 4 Time

0000
October

0001
January

0010
February

0011
March

0100
April

0101
May

0110
June

0111
July

1000
August

1001
September

1010
October (initial)

1 0 1 1 November

1100
December
This switch sets the week when the day light saving
time (summer time) ends.
End day light saving from Sunday 1:00
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 of the last week

0 0 0 1 of the first week

0 0 1 0 of the second week

0 0 1 1 of the third week

0 1 0 0 of the fourth week

0 1 0 1 of the last week (Initial)
3-44
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes

This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in Memory
Switches 010, 011, 012, 013 and 014.
To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 15, bit 7 to 1. (See 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more information on
changing memory switch 015.)
2. When the function is enabled, an Attribute option is added to the address book destination registration
steps. As an address book destination is programmed, an extra step showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2,
Attribute 3, Attribute 4, and Attribute 5 are added as the last step.
3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press
cursor is below the desired bit position; then press 1 or 0 to make the change.
4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.
5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3-4.
6. When the last attribute is set, the fax will advance to the next autodialer programming steps.
3-45
or
until the
Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)

7
Initial
Setting
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Busy tone detection

Sets this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit
0: No
is mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
Fallback pattern (bps)
2400
4800
7200
9600 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
Overseas mode
Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No
the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes
signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
V.29 Echo Protect tone
International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No
suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
transmitted information which may cause the
1: Yes
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
3-46

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data

When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms

Switch 7 0 0 1 1
Switch 6 0 1 0 1
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
3
2
1
0
*
*
*
*
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms

Switch 5 0 0 1 1
Switch 4 0 1 0 1
Output attenuation
See table below.
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
3-47
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0

Switch
7
6
5
Initial
Adjust
Setting
TTI clock type
0
0 : AM PM clock
1 : 24 hour clock
TTI calendor type
0
0
TTI transmit
0: No
1: Yes
NOTE
3
Usage/Comments
bit

65
1 1
1 0
0 1
dd mm yyyy (default)
mm dd yyyy
yyyy/mm/dd
When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled.

The TTI includes the followings:
Sender name
Senders fax number
Data & time, and number of pages
To set the individually transmission of them, see
Memory SW 016.
Turning TTI transmission

off may violate local or
federal regulations.)
ECM response time
The time limit to receive the response signal for the
0: 3 sec
ECM post message.
1: 4.8 sec
ECM error retransmit time
The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms
Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Adjust
Setting
0
ANSam detection
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
V. 34 transmission
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
0 : Yes
1 : No
0
ECM mode
0 : On
1 : Off
0
Retransmit automatically when
receiving RTN / PIN signals
0 : Yes
1 : No
1
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
0
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the
handshake and an error occurs, set to 1.
Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and
CIG signals are disabled.
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and
reception times.
When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN / PIN signals.
3-48
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment

3.5.1 Setting the Unique Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <0>, <4>.
2. Press [Switch Edit].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the unique switch settings:

6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
3-49
3.5.2 Clearing the Unique Switches

Resets the unique switches to factory defaults.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <0>, <4>.
2. Press [Switch Clear].
3. Press [Yes]. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.
4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
Adjustable items :
000
001
003
010
013
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
029
Time to output simulated ring tone

Congestion tone detection
Enable the first tone key
Enable the second tone key
Enable the dial prefix key
Display only direct input number on redial list
The period before detecting busytone after dialing
Including TTI inside the document
The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
Encoding method
V.8 handshake in real time Tx
Available *, # and space upon F-code box registration
Available *, # and space upon F-code communicating
Ignore space in F-code ID
F-code sub-frame off
Retrieve document
Ignore F-code bit
JBIG transmission
Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under
7200 bps
Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under
4800 bps
Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time
transmission
Number of radial times for archive transmission
Transmit CED signal
Pseudo-ring start time
Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory
TCF check time (in 100 ms units)
Document storage method
MMR reception
JBIG reception
Receive the junk fax
Receiving fax in 600 dpi (Super fine)
Encoding method
Displays the message No Network Connection.
3-50
030
032
035
037
050
051
052
053
067
071
072
075
076
077
078
079
081
082
085
095
098
3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34

ANSam output time
Reception level at CED 2100 Hz
The timing between V.34 handshake signals
Smoothing in Hyper Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode
Smoothing in Super Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode
Smoothing in Fine mode
Smoothing in Normal mode
Give priority to fit to paper
Printing margin adjustment
Printer density adjustment
CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready
Number of detection DTMF
Line monitor in Quick memory transmission
Rx document to polling document
DRAM back up
Journal list printing order
Key press time to activate sleep mode
Threshold to determine paper size (vertical direction) from pixel and
resolution
Print time-out on PCL text printing (at local printing)
Print timeout on GDI (at local printing)
Print timeout on PCL (at local printing)
Print dialing error on journal
Copy all data at Copy Machine Settings
Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end
Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty
Receive time stamp position
F4 paper length
Respond warm-up condition as ready on SNMP
Respond Sleep condition as ready on SNMP
3-51
Unique Switch 00x : Dialer

Unique Switch 000 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
3
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Time to output simulated ring
tone
Adjust the time from income to output ring tone. (The

time to detect CED)
bit

Factory use only

Congestion tone detection
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
654
1 1 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 0
4.9 seconds
4.6 seconds
4.3 seconds
4.0 seconds
3.7 seconds
3.4 seconds
3.1 seconds
2.8 seconds
default
Setting this switch to 0 ignores telephone line

congestion tones.
Unique Switch 001 :
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Enable the first tone key
0: No
1: Yes
Enable the second tone key
0: No
1: Yes
Enable the dial prefix key
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Unique Switch 002 Factory use only
3-52
Unique Switch 00x : Dialer

Unique Switch 003 :
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Display only direct input
number on redial list
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
The period before detecting
busytone after dialing
Usage/Comments
Set this switch to 0 to display all dial history on the
redial list. Set this switch to 1 to display only direct
input number on the list.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
1111
1500 ms
1110
1400 ms
:
1000
800 ms
0111
700 ms
0110
600 ms
0101
500 ms
0100
400 ms (Initial setting)
0011
300 ms
0010
200 ms
0001
100 ms
0000
0 ms
Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 Factory use only
3-53
Unique Switch 01x : Transmission

Unique Switch 010 :
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Including TTI inside the
document
0: No
1: Yes
Setting this bit to 0 transmit the document length

added with the TTI. Setting it to 1 transmit the
length including TTI inside the document. However
in this case, the image at the top of the document
might be overlapped with TTI.
(TTI length: 4.2mm)
Factory use only

The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

Unique Switch 013 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Encoding method
Specify the encoding method.

bit

3-54
10
1 1
1 0
0 1
0 0
MMR
MR
MH
Machine capability (default)

Unique Switch 015 Transmission
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Not used
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
V.8 handshake in real time
Tx
0: No
1: Yes
Determine I the handshaking will be done with V.8

recommendation if real time transmission.
Unique Switch 016 Transmission

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Available *, # and space

upon F-code box registration
0: No
1: Yes
Available *, # and space
upon F-code communicating
0: No
1: Yes
Ignore space in F-code ID
0: Yes
1: No
F-code sub-frame off
0: Send
1: Not send
Factory use only
Factory use only
Retrieve document
0: No
1: Yes
Ignore F-code bit
0: No
1: Yes
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space

are available upon F-code box registration.
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
are available upon F-code communicating.
Determines if checking the space stored in the
F-code ID.
Do not send the sub-address and password of
F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal
after EOM signal.
Retrieve the document received in F-code

SecureMail box by polling transmission.
Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS
signal at F-code polled transmission.
Note
The F-code communication is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code
(SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-55

Unique Switch 017 :
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
JBIG transmission
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.
Unique Switch 018 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Disconnect the line when
the transmission speed falls
down under 7200 bps
0: No
1: Yes
Disconnect the line when
the transmission speed falls
down under 4800 bps
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Transmission when disable to
detect first NSF in real time
transmission.
0: Retry to detect NSF
1: Transmit with the standard
protocol
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line

when the transmission speed fall down under 7200
bps.
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
when the transmission speed fall down under 4800
bps.
Determines the action when disable to detect first

NSF in real time transmission.
3-56

Unique Switch 019 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Number of radial times for
archive transmission
Usage/Comments
Switch 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
0000
0 time
0001
1 time
0010
2 times
0011
3 times
0100
4 times
0101
5 times
0110
6 times
0111
7 times
1000
8 times
1001
9 times
1010
10 times
1011
11 times
1100
12 times
1101
13 times
1110
14 times
1111
15 times (default)
3-57
Unique Switch 02x : Reception

Unique Switch 020 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Transmit CED signal
0: No
1: Yes
Pseudo-ring start time
(seconds)
5 6 8 10
Switch 3: 0 0 1 1
Switch 2: 0 1 0 1
Printout the pages completed
to receive during receiving
into memory
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Determines if sending CED signal.

Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after
answering an incoming call.
(Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
Determines if whether to printout the page which

data is completed to receive during receiving it into
faxs memory.
Unique Switch 021 :

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
1
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
TCF check time
(in 100 ms units)
Usage/Comments
If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the

result, lengthen the TCF check time.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0000
0 ms
0001
100 ms
0010
200 ms
0011
300 ms
0100
400 ms
0101
500 ms
0110
600 ms
0111
700 ms
1000
800 ms
1001
900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms Initial setting
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-58

Unique Switch 022 :
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Document storage method
MMR reception
0: No
1: Yes
JBIG reception
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
bit
7
6
5
1
0
1
JBIG
1
0
0
MG3
0
1
1
MMR
Initial setting
0
1
0
MR
0
0
1
MH
0
0
0
IMAGE
Used to determine the encoding method at DIS
declaration.
declaration.
Unique Switch 023 :
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Receiving fax in 600 dpi
(Super fine)
0: No
1: Yes
Encoding method
Usage/Comments
Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.

declaration.
Specify the encoding method.
bit

3-59
10
1 1
1 0
0 1
0 0
MMR
MR
MH
Machine capability (default)

Unique Switch 029 :
7
6
Initial
Setting
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Factory use only

Displays the message No
Network Connection.
0 : Yes
1 : No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Set this switch to 1 will delete the message
No Network Connection. Use this switch if the
machine is not used in a network.
3-60
Unique Switch 03x : Modem

Unique Switch 030 :
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
3429 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
0: No
1: Yes
If the error frame often occurs because of the

symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to
1 mask that symbol rate and keep down the
occurrence of error frame.
See above (switch 5 to 2).
3-61

Unique Switch 032 :
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
ANSam output time
0: 3 seconds
1: 4 seconds
Factory use only
Factory use only
The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave

signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to 1
when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
Unique Switch 033 ~034 Factory use only

Unique Switch 035 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Reception level at CED 2100
Hz
Measure for false detection caused by noise.

Adjust this switch when CED is falsely detected
and T.1.1 error occurs.
bit

1
0
1
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
3-62
32
1 1
1 0
0 1
0 0
-51 dBm
-48 dBm
-41 dBm
-45 dBm
(default)

Unique Switch 037 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
The delay before postmessage is transmitted
Usage/Comments
If retraining occurs due to the low reception signal

level and few delay of the telephone line, it may
overlap the second post-message. In this case,
increase the delay before the post-message is
transmitted.
0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms
Switch 4: 0 0 1 1
Switch 3: 0 1 0 1
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 038 ~ 039 --- Factory use only
Unique Switch 04x :Scanner

Unique Switch 040 ~ 049 --- Factory use only
3-63
Unique Switch 05x : Printer

Unique Switch 050 :
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Smoothing in Hyper-Fine
(400 x 400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Super-Fine
(200 x 400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing at printing lists
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Normal mode
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
Smooths the data scanned in each resolution mode.
Unique Switch 051 :

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Give priority to fit to paper
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
When the received fax is larger than paper in

casette, 0 will print them on suitable size while 1
will reduce to the size to fit then on one paper.
Unique Switch 052 Printer

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Printing margin adjustment
0: Normal
1: No margin
3-64
Unique Switch 05x : Printer

Unique Switch 053 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Printer density adjustment.
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210 Settings
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
Not available
Lightest
:
:
00000101
00000110
00001001
00001011
:
Normal Initial setting

:
Darkest
Not available
3-65
Unique Switch 06x : Remote reception

Unique Switch 067 :
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
1
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
CNG detection during OGM
output in ANS Ready
0: Yes
1: No
Number of detection DTMF
Usage/Comments
Sets the number of detection the DTMF during Ans/

Fax Ready mode.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Number of detection
0000
Not detect
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3 Initial setting
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
1010
10
1111
15
Unique Switch 068 and 069 Factory use only
3-66
Unique Switch 07x : Operation

Unique Switch 071 :
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Line monitor in Quick memory

transmission
0: Off
1: On
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Rx document to polling
document
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Retrieve the document received in the memory by

polling transmission.
Unique Switch 072 :
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
DRAM backup
0 : No
1 : Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
3-67

Unique Switch 075 :
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
1
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Journal list printing order
0: From old history
1: From new history
Key press time to activate
sleep mode
Set how long to press <Energy Save> to activate

sleep mode
Switch 2 1 0 time
111
7 seconds
110
6 seconds
101
5 seconds
100
4 seconds
011
3 seconds
010
2 seconds
001
1 second
Unique Switch 076 :

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Threshold to determine paper

size (vertical direction) from
pixel and resolution
At Print on demand (Box/Folder/USB memory),

the paper is selected from vertical and horizontal
length of the document.
This threshold determines whether to print on one
page or go to another.
bit
76543210

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 mm

:

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 200 mm

:

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 150 mm

:

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 100 mm

:

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 50 mm

:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 mm

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 mm (default)
3-68

Unique Switch 077 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Print timeout on PCL text

printing (at local printing)
bit

1 second/step
Adjustable range: 1~15
seconds
7654
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
1 0 1 0
:
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
15 seconds
14 seconds
13 seconds
12 seconds
11 seconds
10 seconds
5 seconds
4 seconds
3 seconds
2 seconds
1 second
1 second
(default)
Adjust image printing timeout by unique switch 079

bit 7~4.
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 078 :

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Print timeout on GDI (at local
printing)
5 seconds/step
Adjustment range: 5~75
seconds
bit

3-69
3210
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0
:
0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
75 seconds
70 seconds
65 seconds
60 seconds
30 seconds
25 seconds
20 seconds
15 seconds
10 seconds
5 seconds
5 seconds
(default)

Unique Switch 079 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Print timeout on PCL (at local

printing)
5 seconds/step
Adjustment range: 5~75
seconds
bit

7654
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0
:
0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
75 seconds
70 seconds
65 seconds
60 seconds
30 seconds
25 seconds
20 seconds
15 seconds
10 seconds
5 seconds
5 seconds
(default)
Adjust text printing timeout by unique switch 077 bit

7~4.
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
3-70
Unique Switch 08x : Miscellaneous

Unique Switch 081 :
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Print dialing error on journal
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 082 :
7
6
Initial
Setting
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Copy all data at Copy
Machine Settings
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
Use this switch when you replace the main control
panel.
3-71

Unique Switch 085 Miscellaneous
Switch
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when the drum is
near end
0: Yes
1: No
NOTE
Print/Send the consumable

order sheet when toner is
near empty
0: Yes
1: No
NOTE
Receive time stamp position

0: Outside the print area
1: Inside the print area
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
For this feature to work correctly, you must

register several items. See 3.17 Consumable
order sheet on page 3-101.
For this feature to work correctly, you must

register several items. See 3.17 Consumable
order sheet on page 3-101.
Set where to print the time stamp.
3-72

Unique Switch 095 :
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
F4 paper length
Set the F4 paper length

Switch 1 0 length
1 0 353 mm
0 1 342 mm
0 0 330 mm (default)
Unique Switch 096 and 097 Factory use only

Unique Switch 098 :
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
Respond Sleep condition as

ready on SNMP
0 : Respond as sleep
1 : Respond as ready
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Respond warm-up condition
as ready on SNMP
0 : Respond as warm-up
1 : Respond as ready
To print on Row port correctly by AS400, set this

switch to 1.
When this switch is 1, SNMP manager such as
WebJetAdmin displays Ready even if the printer
is in warm-up condition. When the printer warms up
while it is receiving information on Row port, the job
will be divided. The latter divided job will be printed
with initial font as it has no font information. This
setting will avoid this font issue.
To print on Row port correctly by AS400, set this
switch to 1.
When this switch is 1, SNMP manager such as
WebJetAdmin displays Ready even if the printer
is in sleep condition. When the printer sleeps while
it is receiving information on Row port, printing will
be disabled. To enable printing again, this error
should be recovered with administrator authority,
and this setting will avoid this issue.
3-73
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings

User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the units Random Access Memory (RAM) and on the CF
memory card that is attached to the network board.
This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2>.
2. Press [Yes].
3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and
reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the
All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings,
address book entries to help in reprogramming this information.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3>.
2. Press [Yes].
The clear modes initialize the following data :
All RAM Clear
Machine parameter
Memory Switch
Unique Switch
Consumable order sheet

Life moniter
Jounal
Stored images
Serial number
Network Switch
Network Capture
Dial Option Conversion
IFAX Detail Status
: Cleared
Blank : Not cleared
3-74
User Data Clear
3.8 T.30 Monitor

In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC
structure is shown below.
Preamble
Binary coded information
Non-standard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)
Flag
Flag
Address
Facsimili
controll
field
Control
Facsimili
information
field
Frame
checking
sequence (FCS)
The information in this

portion is printed in the T.30
monitor.
The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information
follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile
procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.
3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor

This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication.
2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].
3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print.
1. Press <Job Confirm. / Fax Cancel>.
2. Press the [History] tab and select [Fax Tx] or [Fax Rx].
3. Select the desired communication.
4. Press <*>, <0>, <5>.
3-75
3.8.3 How to see the print out

(Example for fax transmission)
(Example for fax reception)
TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report

RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine
DATA: Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are
in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal.
TCF : TCF check sequence
PIX : Image data
[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]

Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, blank=ECM off)

Mode (S=8dot/mm x 15.4l/mm F=Fine N=Normal)

Receiver's minimum scan line time capability

Recording width document size

Compressing method

Data signalling rate
3-76
NSF, NSC, NSS:

NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30.
The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the
country code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer
code.
TxFrame RxFrame D A T A
NSF
20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

The third byte is the manufactures code

The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H
The first byte indicates the country code
Indicates the NSF code
CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code,
and subscribers telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit
of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number
and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example.
Code
Value
Code
Value
Code
Value
Code
Value
20
Space
32
2
35
5
38
8
30
0
33
3
36
6
39
9
31
1
34
4
37
7
2B
+
An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as:
CIS
30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

20 20 20 20 20
DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and
receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc.
DIS
00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00
The bits are in the following order:
( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17)
(32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41)
(56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57)
Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number:
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
0
0000
4
0100
8
1000
C
1
0001
5
0101
9
1001
D
2
0010
6
0110
A
1010
E
3
0011
7
0111
B
1011
F
So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
3-77
Binary
1100
1101
1110
1111
A transmission with PPR signal:

The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal.
PPS MPS
BF 4F 00 00 0F
PPR
BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value.
So in the above case:
Pages: 00 means one page
Blocks: 00 means one block
Frames: 0F means 16 frames
In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0"
and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.
3.9 Printer maintenance mode

In case of followings, use this mode.
When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.
When Checkout error : XX message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause
of the Checkout error : XX error message.
To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.
3.9.1 When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller

To access the printer maintenance mode:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Set Replace Counter].
3. If youve replaced the fuser, select [Replace Fuser].

If you have replaced the transfer roller skip to step 5.
3-78
4. Press [Yes].
5. If youve replaced the transfer roller, select [Replace Transfer Belt].

6. Press [Yes]. The machine goes back to standby mode.
3.9.2 When Checkout error : XX message is displayed

To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the Checkout error : XX error
message.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call].
3. The kind of printer error will be displayed.
NOTE
See 4.3 Checkout error on page 4-3 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each
are outlined.
3.9.3 Register the e-mail location

To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call e-mail].
3. Select [Send Service Call E-Mail].
3-79
4. Select [ON] and press [Enter].
5. Select [E-mail Mail Address 1].
6. Enter the e-mail address and press [Enter].

7. To send the service report to another location, press [E-mail Address 2] and/or [E-mail Address 3]
and enter the location. Otherwise, skip to step 8.
8. Select [E-Mail Subject].
9. Edit the e-mail subject if needed, and press [Enter].
10. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode.
3-80
3.10 Service Report Printing

You can print out a report that contains machines usage and error history.
3.10.1 Printing the Service Report

3.10.2 Contents of the service report
NOTE
Some device on the service report may not be equipped on your machine.
Contents of the header
Line
1
2
Item
Date
Unit Serial #
Cust Name
Detail
Current date
The machine serial number
The registered TTI or the Customers name registered in
Consumable Order Sheet
3
Fax Number
The fax number registered in User Install
Cust Tel
The telephone number registered in Consumable Order
Sheet
4
Installation Date
The date the machine was installed (The date set at User install)
Days Used / Work Days
Days since the machine is installed / Days the machine has
worked
5
ROM Version
The ROM version of Main ROM, PDL ROM, and Message
Board
The header is common for simple report and detailed report.
3-81
First page of the report.
5
6
7
No.
1
Detail
Paper size per unit

Number of total printed pages
Number of pages printed on current drum (I/C)
Number of pages printed after the resettable counter is cleared and the cleared date.
2
Number of printed pages based on counter calculating procedure
(Four legal size paper is counted five letter size paper)
3
Printer trouble information (Total pages and the pages after the resettable counter is
cleared)
Number of jammed pages
Number of printed pages per jammed section
4
Number of scanned pages / Number of scanned times
Number of scanned pages / Number of scanned times after the resettable counter is
cleared and the cleared date
5
Number of scanned pages based on counter calculating procedure
(Four legal size paper is counted five letter size paper)
6
Scanner trouble information (Total pages and the pages after the resettable counter is
cleared)
Number of document jammed pages per jammed section
7
Life counter
The resettable counter cleared date is printed with six figure of year / month / date.
3-82
Second page of the report
9
10
11
No.
8
9
10
11
Detail
Number of printed pages per paper size and print job.
Total printed pages
Total printed pages on current drum (I/C)
Number of printed pages per paper media and mode.
Number of page per optional device and print job.
Number of scanned pages per document size and mode
3-83
Third page of the report

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Detail
Number of communication times per communication type
Number of PC scan times
Number of times advanced functions used
Number of customer registered information
Machine set-up information
Number of fax communication error per error code
Number of internet-fax communication error
( for engineer only)
3-84
Fourth page of the report
20
21
22
23
No.
20
21
22
23
Detail
20 latest scanner error histories
20 latest printer error histories
20 latest printer jam histories
( for engineer only)
Fifth page is for engineer only.
3-85
3.11 Monitor speaker

If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal
sound with machines speaker during fax transaction.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8>.
2. Select the monitor type from [ON until DIS] or [ON].
3. Select the speaker volume.

To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [OFF].
3.12 Test Modes

This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included
are followings.
Life monitor
Test pattern print
Document feeding test
Set background level
Make color Gamma
Select color Gamma
3.12.1 Life Monitor

This function displays the machine status.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Life Monitor].
2. Press [Detail] to see the options.
ROM Ver.0 = displays main control board software version

ROM Ver.1 = displays network software (Message Board) version
ROM Ver.2 = displays PDL (printer description language) version
Display Item
Scan Count
1
Page Count
Tx (Transmission) Count
Drum Recycled
Drum Life
2
After Replaced
After Caution
Detail
Cumulative total pages
Number of times drum is replaced
Current drum working time (x 10 seconds)
Total printed pages on current drum
Total printed pages since "Replace drum" warning is
displayed
3-86
Display Item
Toner Recycled
Toner Life
3
After Replaced
After Caution0
Fuser Replaced
Fuser Life
Xsfer Replaced
Xfer Life
Word Count (In Use)
Word Count (default)

PCL
PS3 (PS3 option)
PDF (PDF direct print option)
BC (Barcode font option)
CY (Cyrillic font)
CF
PPM
Detail
Number of times toner cartridge is replaced
Toner cartridge working time (x 10 seconds)
Total printed pages on current toner cartridge
Total printed pages since "Toner near end" warning is
displayed
Number of times fuser is replaced
Current fuser working time (x 10 seconds)
Number of times transfer roller is replaced
Current transfer roller working time (x 10 seconds)
The number of words used on display.
If this words are less than the Word Count (default), some words may not be able to display.
Translation is needed for the missing wording.
The number of words the software uses.
Optional items status

(Yes: Equipped, No: Not equipped)
Print pages per minute.
3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor
3-87
3.12.2 Printer Test

The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below.

Checkered
Squares
Paper Scum
Halftone
Ladder

Halftone2
White
LED Head Test
6% Pattern
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Test Pattern Print].
2. Select the desired pattern is displayed.
3-88
Black
3. Select a cassette or tray that holds your desired paper size to test, and press [Enter].
4. Enter the numbers of pages to print and press [Enter].
5. Press [Yes].
The selected pattern will be printed continuously.
Press <Stop> to stop printing.
3.12.3 Feeder test

The feeder test discharges all documents in the automatic document feeder (ADF) at a constant speed and
displays the document total in the LCD.
1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF).
2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Feeder Test].
3. Press [Start] to start the feeder test.
4. Press [End] to exit the test mode.
3-89
3.12.4 Port Status

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3.12.5 Set Background Level

The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a
scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced;
therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed.
The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Background level].
2. Press [Front].
3. Press [Start].
After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the ready screen.
3.12.6 Make color Gamma

The machine has a color gamma data table as color scanning correction data. The color gamma table
adjusts RGB color balance, and is unique per machine because of the optical variation. Both the main
board and compact flash memory card on the network board keep the color gamma table, and the
same data will be saved on both parts when you make a color data though below operation.
Perform this operation to remake the color gamna table when the following parts is replaced:
Lamp
Inverter
Main board and compact flash memory card (replaced at the same time)
Either of the following chart is requied to make the color Gamma:
2007-01 No.20071020
NOTE
Use a clean chart that is not tanned or folder.
3-90
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Make Color Gamma].
3. Set the chart on FBS (Flat Bed Scanner), and press [Make for FBS].
(Set the chart so that scanning starts from the chart top.)
4. Set the chart on ADF, and press [Make for ADF].

(Set the chart so that scanning starts from the chart top.)
5. Press [Close] to go back to test function menu.
3.12.7 Select color Gamma

The machine has a color gamma data table as color scanning correction data. A same color gamma
table is kept on the main board and compact flash memory card on the network board. When one of
the board is replaced, perform the following operation to remake the table on the other.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Select Color Gamma].
2. Select the source to be copied.
Select [CF] when the main board is replaced, and [MFP] when the compact flash memory card is
replaced.
3. Press [Yes].
4. Check the LCD that Yes is displayed at both Unit and CF.
3-91
3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and

Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique
switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
2. Select [ON] to enable duplex printing, or [OFF] to disable it.
3.14 Factory Functions

This function provides several machine machina test.
Test list
Test
Contents
LED test
Light on all the LED lamps to check that the lamps are working.
LCD test
Display test patterns on the LCD to check for dead pixel.
Panel test
Display the key name on the LCD when the key is pressed.
You can check that the keys are working.
SRAM check
Check that the SRAM is working in case that the registered fax
numbers turn into garbage.
DRAM check
Check that the DRAM is working correctly.

Check also when the memory is expanded.
RTC test
Factory use only.
Page memory check
Check that the page memory is working in case that the print images are wrong.
Pseudo ring test
Check the bell of external telephone and the pseudo ring.
Serial number writing
Factory use only.
3-92
3.14.1 LED Test

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LED Test].
2. Press <Start>.
Every time you press <Start> the LED illuminates in the following order:
Green Red Blue All LEDs ON All LEDs OFF
3. Press <Stop> to complete the test.
3.14.2 LCD Test

This mode displays three test patterns in LCD.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LCD Test].
2. Press <Start> to turn all dots off.
3. Press <Start> to turn all dots on.
4. Press <Start> to display letters.
5. Press <Stop> to complete the test.
3-93
3.14.3 Key Panel Test

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Panel Test].
2. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will be displayed.
Copy
Scan
Key
Indication in LCD
Copy
Scan
Fax
Print
Fax
Print
My MFP
Screen 1 to Screen4
Setting
Login
My MFP
Screen 1 to Screen4
Settings
Login
Key
Personal Mode
Job Confirm /Fax
Cancel
Reset
Numeric keys 1 to
10, *, #
Stop
Start
Energy Save
Indication in LCD
Personal
Job Confirm /Fax Cancel
Reset
Tenkey 1 to 0, *, #
Stop
Start
Energy Save
3. Press <Stop> twice to complete the key panel test.
3.14.4 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time, TTI,
etc are stored.
NOTE
When this test is executed, the unit will perform an All RAM Clear.
The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique
switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select SRAM Check.
2. Press <Start>.
The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the read/
write test is successful, the display will show OK.
If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show NG with the address and the data name.
3. Press [Close] to complete the SRAM Check.
3-94
3.14.5 DRAM Check

This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory.
NOTE
When this test is performed, an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. The All RAM clear
erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults.
This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [DRAM Check].
2. Enter the test data.
3. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press <0>.

4. Press [Start].
The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
5. Press [Close] to complete the DRAM Check.
3.14.6 RTC(real time clock) Test

3.14.7 Page memory check

When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Page Memory check].
2. Press [Scanner front memory area].
2. Select the desired checking area.
3. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (see 3.18 DRAM Clear), and then go back to step 1.
4. Press [Close] to complete the page memory check.
3-95
3.14.8 Pseudo ring test

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Pseudo ring test].
2. Press [Start], to ring the bell.
3. Press [End] to stop.

4. Press [Close] to complete the pseudo ring test.
3.14.9 Serial number writing

3-96
3.15 Line Tests

This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are
relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
NOTE
To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.
3.15.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select [Relay].
4. Select the relay you want to test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
CML relay on
CML relay off
S relay on
S relay off
DP relay on
DP relay off
H relay on
H relay off
L relay on
L relay off
CONT24V relay on
CONT24V relay off
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
3-97
RI relay on
RI relay off
Hook key
3.15.2 Tonal Signal Test

The tonal signal test permits the units output tones to be monitored.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Press [Tonal].
3. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.

Signal
None (stop signal)
400 Hz tone
600 Hz tone
1100 Hz tone
1300 Hz tone
2100 Hz tone
3000 Hz tone
3400 Hz tone
FSK WHITE
FSK BLACK
FSK _W1_B1
V27_1200_2400 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 picture date
Signal
Signal
V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600
V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400
V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800
V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200
V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
NOTE
It may take several moments for output signal to change.
3-98
3.15.3 DTMF Output Test

The DTMF output test permits the units DTMF tones to be monitored.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select [DTMF].
3. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Display
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
* (AST)
#
(SHARP)
Signal
DTMF0 (941 Hz 1336 Hz)
DTMF1 (697 Hz 1209 Hz)
DTMF2 (697 Hz 1336 Hz)
DTMF3 (697 Hz 1477 Hz)
DTMF4 (770 Hz 1209 Hz)
DTMF5 (770 Hz 1336 Hz)
DTMF6 (770 Hz 1477 Hz)
DTMF7 (852 Hz 1209 Hz)
DTMF8 (852 Hz 1336 Hz)
DTMF9 (852 Hz 1477 Hz)
DTMF6* (941 Hz 1209 Hz)
DTMF# (941 Hz 1477 Hz)
Display
ROW1
ROW2
ROW3
ROW4
COL1
COL2
COL3
COL4
4. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>.

5. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 3-4.
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.
6. To exit the DTMF output test, press [Close] under not tests.
NOTE
It may take several moments for output signal to change.
3-99
Signal
ROW1 (697 Hz)
ROW2 (770 Hz)
ROW3 (852 Hz)
ROW4 (941 Hz)
COL1 (1209 Hz)
COL2 (1336 Hz)
COL3 (1447 Hz)
COL4 (1633 Hz)
3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode

IMPORTANT
The machine is shipped with mirror carriage locked to protect the machines mirror carriage during
shipping. When installing the machine, slide the scanner locking lever back to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> .
2. Select [OFF].
3. Select the energy save mode start time.

If you chose [No], the setting adjustment is complete.
No
Low power mode :

Sleep mode :
1 minute
1 minute
Yes
Low power mode :

Sleep mode :
15 minutes
60 minutes
4. Select [Yes] to change the energy save mode start time.
IMPORTANT
If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then Press
<Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4>, and [OFF].
3-100
3.17 Consumable order sheet

When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine
prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
8
9
10
11
12
13
Dealers fax number

Customers name
Customers department
Customers address
Customers account
Customers telephone number
Customers fax number registered by
Initial setting mode (Setting, User Install).
Customers e-mail address 1
Customers e-mail address 2
Serial number of the unit
Order item
Description of the order item
Quantity of the order item
14
15
Payment options
Date of payment
29
23
24
25
26
27
28
3-101
Dealers name
Dealers code
Dealers telephone number
Dealers fax number
Dealers e-mail address
Comment
Place of the customer write his/her
signature
Drum used percentage
Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds)
Drum life time
Drum used percentage
Total print pages
Number of print pages after toner bottle
or drum unit was replaced.
ROM version
3.17.1 Set consumable order sheet

1. Clear the junk data, if necessary.
2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
3. Press [Order Sheet].
4. Press [Dealer Code].
5. Enter the Dealers code and press [Enter].

The code may be up to 10 characters in length.
6. Press [Dealer Name].

7. Enter the Dealers name (Suppliers name) and press [Enter].
The name may be up to 30 characters in length.
3-102
8. Press [Dealer Tel No].

9. Enter the distributors telephone number and press [Enter].
The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
10. Press [Dealer Fax No].

11. Enter the dealers fax number and press [Enter].
The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.
12. Press [Cust Account #].

13. Enter the customers account number and press [Enter].
The customers account number may be up to 10 characters in length.
14. Press [Cust Name].

15. Enter the customers account number and press [Enter].
3-103
16. Press [Client department].

17. Enter the customers department and press .
18. Press [Address 1].

19. Enter the customer e-mail address 1 and press [Enter].
The customers e-mail address may be up to 50 characters in length.
20. Press [Address2].

21. Enter the customer e-mail address 2 and press [Enter].
The customers e-mail address may be up to 50 characters in length.
22. Press [Cust Tel].

23. Enter the customers phone number.
The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
3-104
24. Press [Price].

25. Enter the price of toner cartridge and press [Enter].
26. Press [Order Sheet Setting].

27. Select the way to deal with the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its
designed life.
If OFF is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even though the
printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
28. When you have selected [e-mail] in step 27, press [e-mail Subject].
29. Enter the subject when sending the consumable order sheet, and press [Enter].
30. Press [Close] to exit the order sheet setting.
3-105
3.17.2 Clear consumable order sheet

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select [Clear Order Sheet].
3. Press [Yes].
3.17.3 Print consumable order sheet

To check the customers information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select [Order Sheet List].
3-106
3.18 DRAM Clear

This clears the image storage memory.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6>.
2. Press [Yes].
3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3.19 Life monitor maintenance

3.19.1 Resettable counter clearing
Clear the counter of the machine. The following counter will be cleared:
Scanned pages per mode (copy/scan/fax/print)
Scanned times per mode (copy/scan/fax)
Pages per scanner part (ADF/FBS)
Times per scanner part (ADF/FBS)
Scanner jam information
Print pages per cassette
Jammed pages per cassette
Jammed pages per print part
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
2. Select [Initialize resettable counter].
3. Press [Yes].
3.19.2 Reentering the life monitor

Your machine maintains the life monitor value on the main control board. When the main control board
is replaced, reenter the life monitor.
Number of drum replacement : Number of times drum cartridge is replaced
Drum Rotation Time : Time how long the drum has rotated (x 10 seconds)
Number of pages after drum replaced : Print pages on current drum cartridge
Number of pages after drum caution : Print pages after the Drum near end caution is displayed
Number of toner replacements : Number of times toner cartridge is replaced
Toner Rotation Time : Time how long the agitator has rotated (x 10 seconds)
Number of pages after toner replaced : Print pages on current toner cartridge
Number of pages after toner caution : Print pages after the Toner almost empty caution is displayed
Fuser Replaced Count: Number of times fuser is replaced
Fuser Life : Time how long current fuser is working (x 10 seconds)
Transfer Replaced Count: Number of times transfer roller is replaced
3-107
Transfer Life : Time how long current transfer roller is working (x 10 seconds)
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
2. Press [Number of drum replacements].

3. Enter the value and press [Enter].
4. Press [Drum Rotation Time].

6. Press [Number of pages after drum replaced].
8. Press [Number of pages after drum caution].
10. Press [Number of toner replacements].
12. Press [Toner Rotation Time].
14. Press [Number of pages after toner replaced].
16. Press [Number of pages after toner caution].
18. Press [Fuser Replaced Count].
20. Press [Fuser Life].
22. Press [Transfer Replaced Count].
24. Press [Transfer Life].
26. Press [Close].
3-108
3.20 Sensor input test

This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name
changes from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. For example, when open the paper cassette 1, the
CAS1:OFF change to CAS1: ON.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2>.
2. Press either [Scanner Sensor Status] or [Printer Sensor Status].
Scanner Sensor Status

Name
Status
TXIL
OFF: Scanner cover is open
ON: Scanner cover is close
DS1
OFF: No document
ON: Document existing
DS3
Fixed to OFF
DRS
Name
HS
DS2
APS
Status
OFF: Mirror outer than HS
ON: Mirror inner than HS
OFF: No document
ON: Document existing
OFF: Platen cover is open
ON: Platen cover is closed
Fixed to OFF
Printer Sensor Status

Name
Status
THRM
Show the temperature of Heater
roller.
BAT
Show the voltage of the SDRAM
backup battery.
TS1
Show the remaining toner level.
HP
No sensor on this machine
PSS
OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper
SWBK
OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper
DRNW
OFF: Drum new
ON: Drum used
DVNW
OFF: Developing unit new
ON: Developing unit used
CAS1
OFF: Cassette 1 is close
ON: Cassette is open
SIDE_OP OFF: Side cover 1 is close
ON: Side cover 1 is open
CAS2
OFF: Cassette 2 is close
ON: Cassette 2 is open
JAM2_OP OFF: Side cover 2 is close
ON: Side cover 2 is open
CASM
OFF: Bypass tray is close
ON: Bypass tray is open
FRNT_OP OFF: Front cover is close
ON: Front cover is open
Name
TEMP
Status
Show the internal temperature of
machine.
TS2
Show the remaining toner level.
PDS
OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper jam
DREX
OFF: No drum
ON: Detect drum
PES1
OFF: No paper in cassette 1

ON: Detect paper is cassette 1
PES2
OFF: No paper in cassette 2

ON: Detect paper is cassette 2
PES2
OFF: No paper on bypass tray

ON: Detect paper on bypass tray
NOTE
CAS2, PES2 and JAM2_OP do not change, when there is no second cassette attached.
3-109
3.21 Printer diagnostic mode

This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3>.
2. Select the device you want to set to ON.

Fan Full
: Rotate the fan motor with full power
Rx Motor
: Rotate the Rx motor
Dup Dir CW : Rotate the Duplex Motor clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
Mup Mtr
: Rotate the duplex motor
Shift Mtr
: (Not equipped on this machine)
Clutch 1
: Turn on clutch of cassette 1
Clutch 2
: Turn on clutch of cassette 2
Man Clutch : Rotate Bypass tray feed clutch
Reg Clutch : Turn on Register roller clutch
ALL OFF
: Turn the all device to off
3.Press the key once again will turn the device off.
Press [All OFF] to turn all device off at once.
4. Press [Close] to exit.
3-110
3.22 Network service mode

This mode provides the following two items:
Detele Administrator's password
Initialize Authentication method
3.22.1 Delete Administators password

You can clear the administator's password.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. Press [Delete Manager].
3. Press [Yes].
3.22.2 Initialize Authentication Mothod

You can initialize the authentication mode, and return it to its factory default (Stand-alone).
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. Press [Initialize Authentication Method].
3. Press [Yes].
3-111
3.23 Flash Rom Sum Check

This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9> .
2. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3.24 Set Service Report

3.24.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
Destinations Where to send the service report. Up to three fax numbers or 2 e-mail
adrdresses can be registered.
Report format Select between simple report or detailed report.
Period The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on
a determined date and time.
1. Press <Setting>, <4>, <2>.
2. Press [Setting].
3. Press [Send Service Report].
3-112
4. Select [Fax] or [E-mail], and press [Enter].
5. When you have selected [Fax] in step 4, press [Fax Number 1] and then [ON].
When you have selected [E-mail] in step 4, press [E-mail Address 1].
6. Enter the fax number or e-mail address of the destination, and press [Enter].
7. If you want to send the service report to other destinations, press [Fax Number 2], [E-mail Address
2] or [E-mail Address 3] and enter the destinations.
8. Press [Report Format].
9. Select the report format, and press [Enter].
10. Press [Period].

11. Select the period, and press [Enter].
3-113
12. When you have selected [Interval] in step 11, enter the sending interval and press [Enter].
When you have selected [Monthly] in step 11, enter the sending date and time (24-hour format)
and press [Enter].
14. When you have selected [Fax] in step 4, press [Close].

When you have selected [E-mail] in step 4, press [E-mail Subject].
15. Enter the e-mail subject when sending the service report, and press [Enter].
16. Press [Close].
3.24.2 Print the service report

To clear the information of service report:
1. Press <Setting>, <4>, <2>.
2. Press [Service Report].
3.25 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source.
For more detail, see 5.3 Adjustment.
3-114
3.26 Reset printer trouble

This mode clears the service call. Clear the warning when the trouble is settled. If fuser warming up
error is settled, turn the machine OFF and ON following this operation.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Turn the power OFF and then ON.
3.27 Cleaning mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface
of them.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <6>.
2. Select the roller to rotate, and press [ON].
3. Press [Start] to rotate the roller.
3-115
3.28 Key counter mode

If you have attached the key counter to the machine activate this mode to let it count the printedpaper.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <0>.
2. Press [ON] and then [Close].
3.29 Network switch mode

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <1>.
2. Press [Parameter Edit].
When you press [Parameter Clear] and then [Yes], all the parameters return to their default value.
3. Call up the desired parameter by pressing [ ] or [ ] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
3-116
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

6. If you want to set other parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
You can confirm the initial setting of each parameter by the Network Switch List.
The Network Switch List will be printed by pressing [Parameter Print].
Network switch 000: Factory use only

Network switch 001:
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
IP address flag
0:S
end Internet fax character strings
1 : Send IP address
Choose which to use as HELE/EHLO command

parameter.
3-117
Network switch 002:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Maximum session times of
SMTP
Usage/Comments
Set up the maximum session times. The number
between 1 to 32 are available.
00011111

:
00001001

:
00000001
00000000
32 times
10 times
2 times
1 time (default)
Network switch 003:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Adjust
Number of retry times for
archive transmission
Usage/Comments
Set up the retry times for archive transmission.
This setting is adopted for the following transmission
when an available destination is set.
Transmission to a shared folder
E-mail transmission
11111111 255 times

:
00001111 15 times (default)

:
00000001 1 time
00000000 No transmission
Network switch 004:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Internet Fax dialing interval
Usage/Comments
11111111

:
00111100

:
00000010
00000001
00000000
Network switch 005 ~ 010: Factory use only
3-118
255 seconds
60 seconds
2 seconds
1 second
3 seconds (default)
Network switch 011:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Synchronizing interval
of internettime between
machine and SNTP server
11111111

:
00111100

:
00000010
00000001
00000000
255 minutes
60 minutes
2 minutes
1 minute
15 minutes (default)
Network switch 012:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Maximum permissible hours

of difference in machine and
SNTP server
When the difference in machine and SNTP server

is smaller than the set value, the machine does not
refresh the time.
00011000

:
00000010
00000001
00000000
24 hours
2 hours
1 hour
Alwayss refreshes time (default)

Network switch 017:
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
Adjust
Error mail judgement

0 : Judges as error mail
1 : Not judge as error mail
Usage/Comments
Set whether to judge a received e-mail with a

header that has only <> in Return-Path as error
mail.
When it is judged as error mail, only the first page of
that e-mail text will be processed.
3-119
3.30 Touch panel adjustment

Correct the X, Y on the touch panel.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <6>.
2. Touch the left upper corner of the display, and press <Start>.
3. Touch the right bottom corner of the display, and press <Start>.
3.31 Printer control parameter mode

The following two settings are available for the optional print controller is attached:
Synchronize cassette designation command and paper size designation command to HP (Switch 27)
Change barcode font width (Switch 28)
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <7>.
2. Select [Parameter Edit], and press [Enter].
When you press [Parameter Clear] and then [Yes], all the parameters return to their default value.
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ]or[ ],or by pressing the numeric keypad.
5. Adjust the parameter, and press [Enter].
To navigate through the machine parameter settings:
Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other parameter, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
3-120
Printer control parameter 000 ~ 026 : Factory use only

Printer control parameter 027 :
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
-
bit
Cassette
Auto
Bypass tray
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Paper size
Letter
Ledger
Legal
Executive
A3
A4
A5
A6
F4
B4(JIS)
B5(JIS)
B5
B6(JIS)
Half Letter
COM10
Monarch
DL
Postcard
D. Postcard
C5
Custom
8K
16K
Chyou4
Kaku2
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Cassette designation
command
0Default
1HP
Paper size designation
command
0Default
1HP
PCL5
Default
7
2
1
4
5
PCL5
Default
2
6
3
1
27
26
25
24
114
46
45
100
44
102
81
80
90
71
72
91
101
115
116
117
118
Some default cassette designation commands differ from

those of HP. (See table below)
To use HP command, set this bit to "1".
Some default paper size designation commands differ
from those of HP. (See table below)
To use HP command, set this bit to "1".
HP
7
2
4
1
5
PCLXL
Default
1
2
4
5
6
HP
1
2
3
4
5
HP
2
6
3
1
27
26
25
24
114
46
45
100
44
102
81
80
90
71
72
91
101
115
116
117
118
PCLXL
Default
0
4
1
3
5
2
16
17
19
10
11
12
18
20
6
7
9
14
15
8
21
22
23
24
HP
0
4
1
3
5
2
16
17
10
11
12
18
6
7
9
14
15
8
19
20
-
-: No corresponding command
3-121
Printer control parameter 028 :

bit
7
Initial
Adjust
Setting
Change barcode font
0
width
Usage/Comments
Change barcode fonts wider or narrower by step.
The steps are from 7 to -7, but some fonts are limited in
available steps. And some fonts cannot be changed. For
details, see table below.
10000111 Narrower

:
10000100

:
00000000
Selected font

:
00000100

:
00000111
Wider
Code 128
1
2
3
4
5
6
Code 128 Condensed

Code 128 Condensed Bold
Code 128
Code 128 Bold
Code 128 Expanded
Code 128 Expanded Bold
Narrow
Code 39
1
2
3
4
5
BC 3of9 Thin
BC 3of9 Light
BC 3of9
BC 3of9 Semi
BC 3of9 Heavy
Narrow
Codabar
1
Codabar Condensed
2
Codabar
3
Codabar Expanded
I2of5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Upc
1
2
3
4
5
6
Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Light

Interleaved 2of5 Light
Interleaved 2of5 Narrow
Interleaved 2of5
Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Semi
Interleaved 2of5 Semi
Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Bold
Interleaved 2of5 Bold
UPC/EAN Condensed
UPC/EAN
UPC/EAN Condensed Bold
UPC/EAN Bold
UPC/EAN Expanded
UPC/EAN Expanded Bold
Wide
Wide
Narrow
Wide
Narrow
Wide
Narrow
Wide
Printer control parameter 029 ~ 099 : Factory use only
3-122
3.32 Network capture (Packet capture)

You can capture the packet data the machine has sent and received, and download it from the web browser
or sent it to an e-mail address. When you read the data using a packet analyzing tool such tcpdump, you
can use it as a subsidiary tool to detect the cause of transmission problem.
There are two ways to capture the packet data: capturing from web browser and from the machine control
panel.
3.32.1 Capturing packet data from the web browser

1. Start the web browser on computer.
2. Type the machines IP address in the URL address field followed by /service.
e.g. http://192.168.1.10/service
3. Enter login ID and password.

ID
: Administrator

Password
: 12345678
4. Click [Network Capture].
5. Enter the Capture Parameter. Refer to Setting details if needed.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Enter the Output Method. Refer to Setting details if needed.

Click [Save].
Click [Capture Start].
Press [File Tx] when capturing has finished.
NOTE
When sending the capture data has succeeded, the captured data will be deleted automatically. When
you do not send the captured data, press [File Delete] to delete them.
3-123
3.32.2 Capturing packet data from machine control panel

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <8>.
2. Press [Capture Settings].
3. Set up the detailed capture setting. Refer to Setting details if needed.
4. Press [Tx Method].

5. Press [Transmission Method].
6. Select the method, and press [Enter].

7. Press either [e-mail Settings], [Folder Setting] or [FTP Settings] and enter the destination. Refer to Setting
details if needed
8. Press [Close].
9. Press [Capture].
10. Press [Send] when the capture has finished.
NOTE
When sending the capture data has succeeded, the captured data will be deleted automatically. When
you do not send the captured data, press [Delete] to delete them.
3-124
3.32.3 Setting details

The following settings are available for capturing packets:
Target
All Host : To capture the packets between the machine and all hosts, select this.
Specific Host : To capture the packets between the machine and specific host, select this. Enter the host name in the Host field. You can enter only
IP address when you enter it from the machine control panel.
Protocol
Select the protocol to capture. You can select multiple protocols.
Port / Service
Enter the port number or service name to capture. If this field is empty, all ports and
services are captured. You can enter only port numbers when you enter it from the
machine control panel.
Port number entering sample : 21, 80, 88
Service name entering sample: ftp, http, kerberos
# of Packet
Enter the number of packets to capture. When this field is not entered, capturing
does not complete.
You can enter number from 64 to 20,000.
Packet Size
Enter how much bites to retrieve from one packet.

You can enter number from 1 to 1514 bites.
Free
Set up optional tcpdump items.

However the following parapmeters will be ignored even when they are entered:
-w : save file
-c : number of packets
-s : Each capture size from one packet
This field is not available from the machine control panel.
Enter either of the following three output method:

Mail
Enter the e-mail address to send the data by e-mail. The address book is not available.
Folder
Enter the folder path, account and password to send the data to a shared folder.
Folder shortcuts are not available.
FTP
Enter the FTP server folder path, account and password to send the data to a FTP
server. The shortcuts are not available.
3-125
3.33 Storage maintenance

The storage on the Message Board is a Compact Flash (CF) memory card. The following operations are
available with this function:
Erasing Storage : Erase all data stored on the CF memory card and disables it.
Resetting Storage : Initialize the CF memory card. When the machine ROM is updated using the USB
memory, the CF memory card is available again.
3.33.1 Erasing storage
CAUTION
When the storage is erased, the CF memory card is disabled.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>.
2. Press [Storage Erase].
3. Press [Yes].
4. The machine reboots from itself.
3.33.2 Resetting storage

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>.
2. Press [Storage Reset].
3. Press [Yes].
4. The machine reboots from itself.

3-126
3.34 Service function menu

All the field service modes are available from the menu.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <7>, <7>.
2. Select the desired service function to use.
3.35 Wire cleaning warning

This mode makes to display the cleaning warning for drum charge wire and print head in a certain interval (hour
= drum rotation).
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <8>, <6>.
2. Press [ON].
3. Input the interval in hour, and press [Enter].
3.36 Installing language

You can install, edit or delete languages on the machine that is prepared in an USB memory.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <1>.
2. Connect the USB memory on which the language data is stored.
3. Press [Add].
To edit an installed language, select a language and press [Edit].

To delete an installed language, select a language and press [Delete], [Yes]. A default install language
cannot be deleted.
3-127
4. Press the box next to Panel.,
5. Browse the file and press [Enter].

6. Press the box next to WebUl.
7. Browse the file and press [Enter].
8. Click [Add].
The added language will be displayed in Language menu (<Setting> [Management] [User Install]).
When you select the installed language, machine prompts you to reboot the machine.
3.37 Counter information maintenance

The machine has the counter data saved on both the SRAM (main control panel) and CF memory card (network board) with its serial number connected. If for some reasons these two serial numbers do not match,
maintenance the data manually.
NOTE
The maintenance screen is normally displayed when the machine is turned on. Follow step 2. To maintenance the data manually, start operation from step 1.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <3>.
2. Check both counter data on main control board and network board.
To copy the counter data from SRAM (main control panel) to CF memory card (network board), press
[MainCopy.]
To copy the counter data from CF memory card (network board) to SRAM (main control panel), press
[MB Copy.]
3-128
3.38 Quick Initial settings

At installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures.
You can do the following setting with continuously.
1. Initial settings
2. Consumable order sheet settings
3. Service Report settings
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9>.
See following pages, how to set-up each mode:

Initial setting : See Scanner and Fax Guide.
Consumable order sheet : See 3.17 Consumable order sheet on page 3-101.
3.39 Update the software

There are three choices to update the ROM:
Using the USB memory
Using the Network (operating through control panel)
Using the Network (operating through web browser) (see page 3-143)
There are three types of flash ROM to update:

Main ROM
Network ROM
PCL ROM
In following cases, software cannot be updated. Check the machine in advance:
The machine is in operation (scanning, printing, or sending fax etc.)
The memory is in use by delayed transmission or for other reasons.
CAUTION
Do not turn the power off while updating the software. Doing so may damage the main control board.
3.39.1 Updating the software using an USB memory

Update the machine software using an ROM data prepared in an USB memory. You can either update it
automatically to the latest version : Auto Update, or to the desired version by selecting the ROM version
manually : Manual Update.
3-129
Auto Update
To update the ROM automatically, create a Boot folder to the root directory of USB memory, and save the
data there under folders with names under the following roles:
USB flash memory

Boot
Machine
240fEUR
240fEUR_Ver.txt
240f_EUR_xxxxxx_update.bin
Network
MB750
MB750_Ver.txt
MB750_xxxxxx.zip
FWUD.bin
PCL
OP700EN
OP700EN_Ver.txt
OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin
"xxxxxx" indicates the ROM version. For example : A0A0A0

"240f" indicates machine name. When you update D240F, name the folder D240F.
Save a text file with the latest version name and the firmware under the folder with the firmware type name.
The text file should have a name with the firmware type followed by country code :EUR, then an _(underscore) and Ver.

An example for machine ROM text file: 240fEUR_Ver.txt
The firmware should have a name with the firmware type followed by an _(underscore), then the country
code :EUR, an _(underscore), and the ROM version. Machine ROM should also have the string update
following an _(underscore).

An example for machine firmware : 240f_EUR_A0A0A0_update.bin
Following are the firmware types and their names:
Firmware type
Name
Machine ROM
240f or D240F
Network (Message Board)
MB750
PCL
OP700
NOTE
Save only one firmware in each folder. Auto Update is not available when two or more firmware are
stored.
1 Turn off the machine.
2 Connect the USB memory in which the firmware is stored.
3 Turn the machine on to start update.
4 When the display shows Firmware Updating OK, turn the machine OFF and ON.
5 Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.
3-130
Manual update
Updating the ROM manually either by selecting the latest ROM version or by selecting the desired version.
Two or more ROM data can be saved on an USB memory.
USB ash memory

Boot
240fEUR
Machine
240fEUR
240fEUR_Ver.txt
Network
MB750
MB750_Ver.txt
MB750_xxxxxx.zip
FWUD.bin
PCL
OP700EN
OP700EN_Ver.txt
OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin
See "Auto Update" for the saving and naming rules of folders and data.
1 Connect the USB memory in which the firmware is stored.
2 Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>
3 Press [Update from the USB].
3-131
4 Press either [Update to the latest version] or [Specify with specified version].
5 Select the ROM type and ROM version to update, and press [Enter].
When [Update to the latest version] is pressed, select the ROM type to update. The selected ROM type
will be highlighted.
When [Specify with specified version] is pressed, select the ROM type and enter the ROM version.
6
7
8
9
Press [Update].
Press [Yes] and the updating starts.
When the display shows Firmware Updating OK, turn the machine OFF and ON.
Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.
3-132
3.39.2 Updating the software using the network

Update the machine software using an ROM data prepared on a network location. You can either update it
automatically to the latest version, or to the desired version by selecting the ROM version manually.
Store the ROM data on a network location in advance.
a network folder
Machine
240fEUR
240fEUR_Ver.txt
Newtwork
MB750
MB750_Ver.txt
MB750_xxxxxx.zip
FWUD.bin
PCL
OP700EN
OP700EN_Ver.txt
OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin
xxxxxx indicates the ROM version. For example : A0A0A0

240f indicates machine name. When you update D240F, name the folder D240F.
Save a text file with the latest version name and the firmware under the folder with the firmware type name.
The text file should have a name with the firmware type followed by country code :EUR, then an _(underscore) and Ver.

An example for machine ROM text file: 240fEUR_Ver.txt
The firmware should have a name with the firmware type followed by an _(underscore), then the country
code :EUR, an _(underscore), and the ROM version. Machine ROM should also have the string update
following an _(underscore).

An example for machine firmware : 240f_EUR_A0A0A0_update.bin
Following are the firmware types and their names:
Firmware type
Name
Machine ROM
240f or D240F
Network (Message Board)
MB750
PCL
OP700
1 Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>
2 Press [Update from the network].
3-133
3 Press [Specifying Server].

This step is needed only at the first time. When once the setting is registered, skip to step 5.
4 Enter the Protocol, Path, Account, Password, Proxy Server, and Proxy Port, and press [Close].
5 Press either [Update to the latest version] or [Specify with specified version].
6 Select the ROM type and ROM version to update, and press [Enter].
When [Update to the latest version] is pressed, select the ROM type to update. The selected ROM
type will be highlighted.

When [Specify with specified version] is pressed, select the ROM type and enter the ROM version.
7 Press [Update].
8 Press [Yes] and the updating starts.
9 When updating is finished, turn the machine OFF and ON.
10 Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.
NOTE
The setting you entered at step 4 will only be saved when you continue the updating steps until
step 8. When you cancel the steps, the setting will not be saved.
3-134
3.39.3 About error

If an error occurred during updating, a five-digit error code will be displayed. The first digit indicates the ROM
type, the rest indicates the cause of the error.
ROM type
Code
1
3
4
0
ROM type
Main
Network
PCL
Could not specify
Error cause
Code
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060
1070
1080
1200
1400
2030
Cause / Countermeasure
Start error detected.
Could not find the ROM file. Check the specified file.
USB memory read error. Check the USB memory is working correctly.
Network board read error. Check the network boar is working correctly.
File read error. Check that the ROM file are stored correctly.
The machine is in use. Update when the machine and the memory are free.
Could not find the ROM file. Check the specified file.
Unable to update. Check the main control board is working correctly.
Start error (1020)

The datailed errror code will be displayed when you press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>. The four-digit nubers in
the parenthesis is the detailed errors for start error.
Third digit error code

Code
0020
Fax is in use. (Reserved communications are existing.)
0080
Memory is in use.
00A0
Fax and memory are in use.
Last digit error code
Code
0000
No information
0001
Machine is operating.
0002
Machine is printing.
0003
Machine is operating and printing.
0004
Machine is scanning.
0005
Machine is printing and scanning.
0006
Machine is operating and scanning.
0007
Machine is operating, printing, and scanning.
0008
Machine is communicating.
0009
Machine is operating and communicating.
3-135
000A
000B
000C
000D
000E
000F
Machine is printing and communicating.

Machine is operating, printing, and communicating.
Machine is scanning and communicating.
Machine is operating, scanning and communicating.
Machine is printing, scanning and communicating.
Machine is operating, printing, scanning and communicating.
For example
When the display shows 1020(008A), the update did not start because the memory is in use, and the machine was printing and communicating.
3.39.4 The indication while updating

While the software is being updated, you can be checked the status through LED lamps on the panel.
Updating Status
Lighting LED
1
<Login>
2
<Personal>
3
<Job Confirm.>
Status
Initializing step
ROM data acquisition step
Updating step
Updating ROM type

Lighting LED
4
<Copy>
5
<Scan>
6
<Fax>
ROM type
Main ROM
Network
PCL
Result
Lighting LED
7
Information lamp
ROM type
Green : Update has succeeded
Red
: Update failed
3-136
3.40 Network service functions

The following topics will be covered in this section:
Starting the service functions
Downloading image data
Internet FAX detailed status
Dial option conversion settings
Firmware Update via network
Firmware Update
Print Data Capture
Network Capture
Modifying the session control time
Storage replacement operation
To open the network service screen,

1. Start the web browser on computer.
2. Type the machines IP address in the URL address field followed by /service.
e.g. http://192.168.1.10/service
3. Enter login ID and password.

ID
: Administrator

Password
: 12345678
4. Now the network service settings are available.
3-137
3.40.1 Downloading image data

You can download the image data stored on the network board using this function. The data is downloaded
in .zip format.
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-137)
2. Click [Retrieve Documents].
3. The folders will be displayed. Click the folder which contains your desired image data.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen and download the image data.
3.40.2 Internet FAX detailed status

2. Click [IFAX Setailed status].
Items
Tx Minimum Wait
Retry Setting
Insert X-CIAJWNETFAX
header
Instructions
Set the transmission interval for internet fax with location specified by IP address.
# of Retry : Set the number of times to retry sending the internet
fax when a memory overflow occurred or a socket
error occurred.
Retry interval :Set the retry interval sending the internet fax when
a memory overflow occurred or a socket error occurred.
To add a X-CIAJWNETFAX header always, set this function to
On.
This header is usually added only to IFAX that default body and
message are edited, so that the other machine will not print the
message.
When this function is On, the body and message will not be
printed on the partner's IFAX machine even if the user has edited
them. (Other companies IFAX may print them.)
3-138
X-Mailer
MDN Expired Time
Tx E-Mail MIME char setting
Possible reception size
To add X-Mailer information (mailer name), enter it here.

Set the time which after that the MDN will be printed respectively.
The available time is from 0 to 72 hours. When MDN is demanded in IFAX transmission for several addresses, MDN, which will
be received within this set up time, will be printed together in one
list.
If the time is set up to 0, MDN will be printed every time when it
is received.
Select which code to use when transmitting characters other than
ASCII code.
Select LATIN9 (ISO-8859-15) only when the user wants to use
this code.
When only ASCII code is used, the message is transmitted with
US-ASCII regardless of this setup.
See the codes on the next page.
Specify the maximum data size for Scan-to-xx. The available
range is from 20-40 MB. Only even numbers are available.
The total size is shared with Internet fax: that means when large
size is specified for Scan-to-xx, internet fax has small size available. This memory is separated from the machine image memory
and is on the network board.
3-139
3-140
3-141
3.40.3 Convert dialling characters in e-mail gateway functions

The following dialling characters will be converted to certain characters specified here:
Pause (/P)
Tone (/T)
Flash (/F)
For example, when you enter &A for /P (pause) and specify a fax number like 123/P456, the number will
be converted to 123&A456 and transmitted at e-mail gateway transmission.
2. Click [Dial Option Conversion].
3. Enter the characters to which the machine should convert the dialling character.
4. Click [Save].
NOTE

The Flash character (/F) is not available for USA.

Up to two characters are able to enter for each dialling character.
For available characters, see table below.
If the box is blank, the dialling characters will be overridden when transmitting over the e-mail gateway.
3-142
3.40.4 Firmware Update Via Network

To update the machine via network, set the items.
2. Click [Firmware Update via Network Server].
3. Enter the necessary information.
4. Click [Update] to start update.
5. When updating is finished, the machine reboots from itself.

6. Check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded. The ROM version is displayed at Machine
Status on the Message Board.
3.40.5 Firmware Update
NOTE
This updating procedure required enough free space on CF memory card. If there is no free space on CF
memory card, this way of update is unavailable.
2. Click [Firmware Update].
3. Click [Browse] to browse the location where the firmware file is located.
4. Click [Update].
5. When updating is finished, the machine reboots from itself.
6.Check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded. The ROM version is displayed at Machine
Status on the Message Board.
3-143
3.40.6 Print data capture

User can capture and store the PCL Print Commands as a .PRN File in CF card on Network Board. This
feature supports concurrent processing to print PCL print data and capture PCL commands.
This feature works with PCL Network Print via LPR, Port 9100 and IPP.
2. Click [Print Data Capture].
3. Enter the necessary information.
4.
5.

6.
Click [Capture Start] to start capturing the data.

Click [Capture Stop] to stop capturing.
Capturing also stops when the window is closed or the machine is turned off.
Click HTTP Download, follow the instruction displayed, and download the captured file.
7. Click [File Delete] to delete the file from the CF card.
3.40.7 Network capture

For details of this future, refer to 3.32 Network capture (Packet capture).
2. Click [Network Capture].
3. Enter the necessary information. Refer to 3.32.3 Setting details if needed.
4. Click [Capture Start] to start capturing the data.

5. Click [File Tx] to send the captured the data to the specified location.
3-144
3.40.8 Modifying the session control time

Modify the session time between the machine and the Message Board users here. The factory default is 30
minutes.
When there is no communication between the machine and the Message Board user during this time, the
user will forcibly be log out.
The time can be set between 10 to 1440 minutes (24 hours).
2. Click [Session Control time].
3. Input the desired value and click [Save].
3.40.9 Storage replacement operation

In following cases, a display urges you to enter Administrators password. In such case, enter the Administrator password of the former device.
When a CF memory card used by other machine is attached.
When a CF memory card is removed and updated.
When either the main control board or the network board is replaced.
When unique switch 82 bit 6 is set to 1 and the machine setting data are imported.
3-145
4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting flow chart
Check the detail of the trouble.
Is the user operating the machine correctly?
No
Does the problem still occurs

with correct operation?
Yes
Is the problem solved by

"Initial checks" operation?
see page 4-2
Solve the problem according to the following menu.

Checkout error C o m m u n i c a - Image failure
tion error
D o c u m e n t Recording jam Machine maltrouble

trouble
function
See page :
4-3
See page :
4-41
See page :
4-7
See page :
4-25
4-1
See page :
4-44
See page :
4-45
4.2 Initial checks

Check all items:
Machine
Toner
Paper
Paper path
Scanning area /
Document
Communication
Printer environment
Others
Check items
Is the power on?
Are the covers closed correctly?
Is the recording paper set?
Are the toner and drum set correctly?
Is the recommended toner used?
Remedy
Turn the power on.
Close all covers correctly.
Set the recording paper.
Set the toner and drum correctly.
Advice customers to use recommended toner otherwise image failure may
occur easily.
Do customers use paper conform to the spec- Advice customers to use suitable
ification designed for use in the machine?
paper otherwise image failure or paper
jam may occur easily.
Does folded or wrinkled paper set in the pa- Reload new paper.
per cassette?
Is the paper set correctly?
Refer the user's guide to set the paper
correctly. If paper size dial adjustment
or other operation such as paper size
registration is needed, follow the instruction.
Are the inner parts such as fuser, transfer
Clean the parts with paper cleaner or
roller, or transfer guide dirty with paper waste etc.
or toner?
Are all cassette parts working smoothly?
Replace the part not working smoothly.
Are foreign objects on the paper path?
Remove the objects.
Are the feed rollers worn out?
Replace the roller.
Do customers use document conform to the Instruct customers to scan document
specification designed for use in the maon document glass when the document
is not suitable for ADF. Using unsuitchine?
able document on ADF may cause
document skew, separation problem or
document jam easily.
Are foreign objects on scanning path?
Remove the object.
Is the scanner dirty?
Clean the scanner as dirty scanner
may cause image failure.
Are the separator roller and separator pad
Replace the roller or the pad
worn out?
Is the machine connected to a line jack with a Reconnect it.
line cable?
Are there advanced fax functions such as
In some functions, free communication
closed transmission or block junk fax set?
is not possible.
Is the machine connected to a network hub (or Reconnect it.
printer) with LAN cable (or USB cable)?
Is the print driver or TWAIN driver installed
Reinstall the driver following the user's
correctly?
guide.
If the machine is on network, is the network Refer to the user's guide and set up
setting correct?
the network setting.
When the machine is turned on in a warm
Wipe the parts with dry soft cloths, or
place while the machine is cool (in winter, es- wait for ten to twenty minutes after
pecially at machine installation), condensation power on.
occurs inside the printer that causes various Instruct customers to open toner or
problem.
drum bag after it becomes to room
Trouble examples:
temperature.
Low image density or uneven density due to
recording part condensation.
Image trouble due to toner moisture absorption
Blur image due to condensation on drum
surface.
Paper discharge problem due to condensation in paper supply path.
4-2
4.3 Checkout error

4.3.1 Checking the error message
When Checkout error message is displayed, follow the steps below to check the service call number.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.

2. Press [Service Call].
3. Check the service error code on the display.
4-3
4.3.2 Service error code

Code
08:
0B:
18:
1E:
47:
Error Message
RX Motor Error
Fan Error
Fuser Error
Drum Cartridge Fuse Error
Developer Cartridge Fuse Error
08: RX Motor Error

Causes:
The machine checks the motor error signal in one second the motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for continuous 300ms, this message will be displayed.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Check the connection between RX motor and main control board.

2. Verify the RX motor rotates when the power is on. If OK, see step 5.
3. Check that power is supplied to the Rx motor. If it does not, see step 5.
4. Replace the RX motor if it doesnt rotate.
5. If the problem is not solved, replace the main control board.
0B: Fan Error

Causes:
The machine checks the fan error signal for three seconds in one second after the motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for continuous 400ms, this message will be displayed.
1. Verify the inside fan rotates when the power is on.

2. Check the connection between the fan and Connect A PCB(P87), Connect A PCB (P80C) and the
main board.
3. Replace the fan motor if it doesnt rotate.
4. Replace the Connect A PCB.
5. Replace the main control board.
18: Fuser Error

Causes:
(The number indicates the detailed error code)
0 The fuser did not become to the main motor driving temperature in 50 seconds after printing started.
1 The fuser did not become to the paper pick-up temperature in 50 seconds after printing started.
2 The fuser did not become to the main motor driving temperature in 30 seconds after warming up
started.
3 The fuser did not become to the warm-up finishing temperature in 30 seconds after the motor started driving.
4 A temperature of 250C or higher is detected in a mode other than sleep mode.
5 The fuser does not warm after fuser error is solved and the power is turned OFF/ON.
6 A low temperature of 10C is detected in 10 seconds after printing started.
7 A temperature of 190C is detected in ready mode after printing finished.
4-4
1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up. If it does not, see step 4.
2. Check the contact between Fusing thermistor and Connect A PCB(P89).
3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board.
4. Replace the Fuser.
5. After replacing the Fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is on.
6. Replace the main control PCB.
1E: Drum Cartridge Fuse Error

Causes:
The machine could not blow the fuse.
1. Verify the drum cartridge is set correctly.

2. Check the point of contacts between drum cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86)
4. Replace the drum cartridge.
47: Developer Cartridge Fuse Error

Causes:
The machine could not blow the fuse.
1. Verify the toner cartridge is set correctly.

2. Check the point of contacts between toner cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86).
4. Replace the toner cartridge.
4-5
4.3.3 Network system errors

In case MB sytem error occurs, refer to the table below to address them.
Error
Trouble
Trouble detail
Detection timing
code
300 Eternal reboot is The firmware detected an incorrect
The machine
detected.
status, and machine rebooted to
reboots while
recover them automatically. When
rebooting at the
this status is detected twice, this error same timing.
occurs.
You may better the auto-recover
process by updating the firmware. The
detail will be printed on the service
report with developer's code.
When the machine
400 System data
This error occurs with firmware or
clearing error
hardware defect.
is powered on.
This error occurs when the machine
reboots from User data clear or All
RAM clear, and an incorrect status is
detected.
Countermeasure
1. Update the
ROM using the
USB memory
automatically.
2. Replace the storage
(HDD/CF card).
1. Update the
ROM using the
USB memory
automatically.
(HDD/CF card).
3. Replace the network
board.
When the machine 1. Update the
This error occurs when an optional
5XX Version
is powered on.
ROM using the
CF memory card is attached to the
mismatching
USB memory
network board, and the firmware
error
automatically.
version on the CF memory card and
network board do not match.
(HDD/CF card).
1XXYY* System error
This error occurs with firmware or
When the machine 1. Update the
is powered on.
ROM using the
hardware defect.
USB memory
Firmware defect will be recovered by
automatically.
updating it, but hardware defect needs
its replacement.
board.
3. Replace the main
control board.
2XXYY* Setting data
Occurs mainly when the data stored When the machine 1. Update the
ROM using the
initialize error
on the CF memory card is corrupted. is powered on
USB memory
You may recover it by updating the
automatically.
firmware, if that does not work, clear
2. Perform All RAM
the data.
Clear.
(HDD/CF card).
board.
* : XX and YY are function returned values.
4-6
4.4 Communication tourble

4.4.1 Fax communication error
The error code are printed on T.30 monitor.
Phase
Tx Phase A
Tx Phase B
Error code
D.0.1
D.0.2
D.0.3
D.0.7
D.0.8
T.1.1
T.2.1
T.2.2
Detail
Error code
0001
0002
0003
0007
0008
1011
1021
1022
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
110A
110B
110C
110D
Description
Local busy detection.
Busy Tone detected
Canceled transmission while dialing
Receiver does not answer
Can not detect dial tone
T1 time-out error
Can not detect CFR or FTT

Compatibility error
Password transmission not failed
Cannot obtain password at password
transmission from receiving party
The obtained password from receiver at
password transmission is blank
The receiver is a product of other maker
at closed communication
The receiver has no pass code field at
closed transmission
The pass code did not match at closed
transmission
No document stored for polling
Journal
No
Redial
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Only
when one
or more
pages are
received
No
Message
The sending was stopped. Please try again.
The line was busy. Please try again.
Fax job was cancelled by user.
Check condition of remote fax.
No dial tone detection. Check line connection.
Confirm the remote fax.
Note
Occurs at broadcast with TCR.

ID check Tx error. ID was not matched.
ID check Tx error. No fax number stored in remote fax.
Close Tx error. Remote fax is not compatible.

Close Tx error. No pass -code stored in remote fax.
Close Tx error. Passcode unmatched.
Polling Tx error. No document for polling is stored in
memory.
Close Tx error. Passcode unmatched.
The pass code did not match at pass

code polling
at pass code polling
Cannot adjust communication data rate
Cannot adjust the communication mode
(Normal, fine, super fine)
Cannot receive standard frame
DIS T4 bit did not turn ON
DIS or DTC that FIF is 00 00 00 has
been received. DTS requires hang up.
German models only.
This error occurs at manual

reception.
Close polling Tx error. Remote fax is not compatible.


4-7
Normally, this error does not

occur.

occur.
Phase
Tx Phase B
Error code
T.2.2
Detail
Error code
110E
110F
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
Tx Phase C
T.2.3
T.3.1
1023
1031
Tx Phase D
T.4.1
1041
T.4.2
T.5.1
T.5.2
T.5.3
Tx V34 start up T.8.1
1042
1051
1052
1053
1081
1800
Journal
The receiver has no box with marching Yes

sub-address
The receiver has no box that matches
with the sender
No document stored at polling in the
designated box
The receiver tried to poll document in a
security box
Polling rejected while receiving document on another line at multi line reception
Polling rejected while storing or clearing
documents
Polling rejected while printing documents
Cannot fast remote diagnose
Trouble report was sent, but the receiver
was not a diagnose host
FTT returned at 2400 bps
Document feeding error
Yes
Document length was over 1m
Lamp error
Scanner cover open error
Cannot receive MCF/RTN/RTP/PIP/PIN Yes
T.8.10
T.8.11
1803
108A
108B
RTN was received

No response to RR
No response to CTC
EOR output
V8 process did not finished normally
Yes
Primary channel instruction did not
match at V8 mode
match at V8 mode (TX FAX)
match at V8 mode (RX FAX)
Cannot adjust modulation
Cannot finish line probing normally
No
Cannot finish equalizer training normally
T.1.4
1014
Operator canceled the transmission
1801
1802
Transmission
canceled
Description
Yes
Redial
No
Message
F-Code Tx Error. No F-Code information in the remote
machine.
F-Code Tx Error. The Box does not exist in the remote
machine.
F-Code Tx Error. No document for polling is stored in FCode box.
Check condition of remote fax.
Note

reception.
F-Code Polling error. Cannot access the F-Code box.
No High-speed RDS. Cannot send a data.
No
Cannot send a trouble report. Remote machine is not RDS

host.
Cannot receive with minimum speed.
Scanning error. Please send again.
Only at
memory Tx
No
The remote machine could not receive document.
No
No
No
Cannot send a fax in SuperG3 mode.
Yes
No
4-8
Fax job was cancelled by user.

reception.
Phase
Rx Phase B
Error code
R.1.1
R.1.2
Detail
Error code
2011
2012
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
210A
210B
210C
210D
210E
210F
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
Description
T1 time-out error
Compatibility error
at closed communication
No pass code received at closed communication
The receiver has no pass code field at
closed communication
Journal
Redial
No
No, if no
page is
received at
auto reception
Yes
No
Message
Note
Occurs at manual reception.

Closed Tx Err. Remote fax is not compatible.
Close Rx error. No passcode stored in remote fax.
Close Rx error. Passcode unmatched.
Reception blocked because of junk fax

blocking function
Cannot receive sender's ID at junk fax
blocking function
Sender's ID is blank at junk fax blocking
function
Sender has no polling document stored
Reject.
Reception was rejected by the block junk fax function.
Polling Rx error. No document for polling is stored in remote fax.

Cannot adjust communication data rate

Cannot adjust communication code (MH,
MR, MMR)
Cannot adjust communication code
(Normal, fine, super fine)
Cannot adjust ECM mode
Cannot adjust document width
Cannot adjust minimum communication
time
Cannot adjust document length
Cannot receive standard frame
Out-of -paper reception buffer error
Cannot receive error report at F-code
relay reception because wrong TSI
Cannot receive document because
sender has not polling ability
Cannot receive F-code document because of wrong sub address
The receiver has no box that matches
with the sender
Document was sent to a reception protected box
Reception rejected while receiving
document to that box on another line at
multi line reception

Out of paper reception is full.
The F-Code RelayReception cannot be performed if fax
number is not stored.
F-Code Polling error. Remote machine does not have FCode polling function.
F-Code Tx Err. The box does not exist in the machine.
F-Code Rx Err. The F-Code is set as the ban on reception.
F-Code Rx Err. Cannot access the F-Code box.
4-9

occur.
Phase
Rx Phase B
Error code
R.1.2
Detail
Error code
2116
Description
Journal
R.2.3
R.3.1
211B
2023
2031
R.3.3
2033
The F-code box stores document to its Yes

maximum capacity
Reception rejected while storing or
clearing documents
Reception rejected while printing documents
Cannot delete document for overwrite at
overwrite mode
Cannot update Flash ROM through communication
Cannot fast remote diagnose
No answer to FTT
No answer to CFR
Yes
DCN received
Hang up
R.3.4
R.3.6
R.4.4
R.4.1
R.4.2
R.5.1
2034
2036
2044
2041
2042
2051
Continuous error line detected

DCN received to TT
FRTN output
Memory overflow
Too long document received
Cannot receive MPS/EOM/EOP
Cannot receive RR
R.5.2
Rx V34 start up R.8.1
2052
2081
2800
2117
2118
2119
211A
Rx Phase C
Rx Phase D
2803
DNC received
Error occurred while ECM data mode
V8 process did not finished normally
match at V8 mode
match at V8 mode (TX FAX)
match at V8 mode (RX FAX)
Cannot adjust modulation
R.8.10
208A
Cannot finish line probing normally
R.8.11
208B
Cannot finish equalizer training normally
2801
2802
Redial
No
Message
Note
F-Code Rx Err. The F-Code box is full.

F-Code Rx Err. Cannot access the F-Code box
Machine error.

occur.
Reception was stopped.
No
No High-speed RDS. Cannot receive data.

Reception was stopped.
Yes
No

Some pages are not received correctly.
Memory over.
Received doc. is not able to receive.
Yes
No
Cannot send a fax in SuperG3 mode.
No
Yes at polling reception

Yes at polling reception
4-10
Document over 3m
4.4.2 Network communication error

Scan to E-mail / Internet FAX transmission results
Error code
Display
Message
1000
Transmission OK
complete
995
Transmission Not able to transmit.
error
Mail server is not found.
988
Not able to transmit.
Please confirm setting.
987
990
997
989
Please confirm address e-mail
address.
993
Please transmit a message once
992
again.
991
999
996
986
984
985
980
994
Not a reply from e-mail server.
1002
Transmission Not able to transmit.
canceled
Stopped.
Description
Transmission completed.
Countermeasure
DNS server name resolution failed.
Check the DNS setting.
Authentication method in SMTP is dif- Check the SMTP/POP setting is correct.

ferent.
User authentication failed.
MAIL command in SMTP failed.
Main setting is not correct.
RCPT command in SMTP failed.
Check the e-mail address set as destination is correct.
Socket error.
Response time out error.
SMTP command failed.
Memory error.
Transmission job parameter error.
File generating error.
Code converter error.
File not existing.
Unknown error.
Connection error.
Stop error.
4-11
Try transmission again.

Check the network connections.
Internet FAX reception result

Error code
1
2
3
Descrpition
Countermeasure
The MFP is not compatible with the

e-mail attached image.
The MFP refused to forward the
receivd e-mailed.
Cannot access to POP3 server.
No response from POP3 server.
POP3 server authentication failed.
Result of the reception error

Code
Display and history
1
(No message)
2
Fax forwarding
3
Print
4
Error E-mail (MDN)
5
Error E-mail (Forwarding)
6
Error E-mail (Reply)
7
Error E-mail (Notice)
8
Error E-mail (Size over)
9
Erase
Ask the sender to send an internet fax in a comabatible file

format.
To respond to the forward request, set Response to Fax
Forwarding Request in E-mail Settings > Optional E-mail Settings.
Check E-mail address or domain name that will accept forwarded transmission at Response to Fax Forwarding Request in E-mail Settings > Optional E-mail Settings.
Chek that POP3 Server Address, POP3 Port Number, SSL,
and POP3S Port Number is set correctly in E-mail Settings >
SMTP/POP Settings.
Check the DNS server addressn in TCP/IP setting.
Check the following items are set correct in E-mail Settings
> SMTP/POP Settings: POP3 server address, POP 3 port
number, SSL usage, and POP 3 S port number.
Check the following items are set correct in E-mail Settings >
SMTP/POP Settings: Authentication method, POP3 user name,
and POP 3 user password.
Check message
-
Description
The mail was received, and processed successfully.
FAX forwarded.
Printed (MDN or DSN).
An error occurred, and replied to the MDN.
An error occurred, and e-mail is forwarded.
An error occurred, and an e-mail is replied
An error occurred, and an notification is sent.
An error occurred, and oversize notification is sent.
The e-mail was deleted.
4-12
Scan to folder, Scan to Printer transmission result

Error Code
10000
9999
9000
9994
9993
9989
3
18
19
20
21
Description
Check message
Transmission completed OK
successfully
System error
System error occurred.
Domain was not found.
Domain was not found.

(This error does not apComputer was not found pear on check message
and communication history)
Computer was not found.
(This error does not appear on check message
and communication history)
Size of a file to acquire Size of a file to acquire
exceeded size at the
exceeded size at the maximaximum.
mum.
Connection error
Not able to be connect.
Detail
Countermeasure
Error occurred of temporary system shortage.
Wait for a while, and try to

send again.
This error occurres when Check that host name on the

a same host name is on network.
the network.
Check that host name on the
This error occurres when network.
a same work group name
is on the network.
Internal erDescription
ror
Success Success
SMB error
Internal error
This error does not occur at
scan to folder.
It occurs at browsing a file
using touch panel or WEB
browser.
The attached file size ex- Check the file size of the atceeds the limitation.
tached file.
This error occurs when a Check that host name on
same work group name
the network.
is on the network.
Check DNS server ad Name resolution failed
dress, DNS suffix, and
WINDS server address are
set correct at "TCP/IP settings".
Check that the destination
computer name is registered on DNS server.
computer registers WIND
setting correctly.
4-13
Parameter Invalid parameter

error
Error
Data retrieval error
retrieving
data
Invalid
Invalid open mode
open mode
Server
Server does not support
doesn't
MAC signing
support
MAC signing
MAC sig- MAC signature in incoming
nature in packet was broken
incoming
packet was
broken
Error Code
22
23
24
25
Description
Connection error
Check message
Internal erDescription
ror
database
Database object already exsame work group name
the network.
object alists and cannot be created
is on the network.
Check DNS server adready exists
Name resolution failed
and cannot
WINDS server address are be created
set correct at "TCP/IP set- mount failed CIFS Client mount failed to
for a reason
tings".
connect to remote server
Check that the destination other then
authentication
computer name is regisunable to dis- unable to dispose resources
tered on DNS server.
Check that the destination pose resourccomputer registers WIND es
invalid handle invalid handle passed
setting correctly.
Detail
Countermeasure
passed
SPNEGO
negotiation
did not find a
match
path should be
resolved over
DFS
DFS cache
overflow
SMB_
ERRbadfunc
26
27
28
1001
1007
SMB_
ERRbadmcb
1008
SMB_
ERRnomem
1009
SMB_
ERRbadmem
4-14
SPNEGO negotiation did not

find a match
path should be resolved over
DFS
DFS cache overflow
Invalid function. The server
did not recognize or could
not perform a system call
generated by the server, e.g.
set the DIRECTORY attribute on a data file, invalid
seek mode.
Memory control blocks destroyed
Insufficient server memory to
perform the requested function
Invalid memory block address
Error Code
1010
1011
1003
1013
1015
1016
Description
Connection error
Check message
Detail
Countermeasure

the network.
is on the network.
Check DNS server ad Name resolution failed
setting correctly.
Internal error
SMB_
ERRbadenv
SMB_
RRbadformat
SMB_
ERRbadpath
SMB_
ERRbaddata
SMB_
ERRbaddrive
SMB_
ERRremcd
1017
SMB_
ERRdiffdevice
1032
SMB_
ERRbadshare
1033
SMB_ERRlock
1066
SMB_
ERRdontsupportipc
1080
SMB_
ERRfilexists
1087
SMB_
ERRbaddirectory
4-15
Description
Invalid environment
Invalid format
Directory invalid. A directory
component in a pathname
could not be found.
Invalid data (generated only
by IOCTL calls within the
server)
Invalid drive specified
A Delete Directory request
attempted remove the server's current directory
Not the same device (e.g. a
cross volume rename was
attempted)
The sharing mode specified
for Open conflicts with existing FIDs on the file.
A Lock request conflicted
with an existing lock or specified an invalid mode, or an
Unlock requested attempted
to remove a lock held by
another process.
The specified device type
conflicts with the actual
device type on the remote
resource.
The file named in the request
already exists.
Invalid directory name in a
path.
Error Code
1122
1123
1183
1230
Description
Connection error
Check message
Detail
Countermeasure

the network.
is on the network.
Check DNS server address, DNS suffix, and
setting correctly.
1231
1232
Internal error
SMB_
ERRinsufficientbuffer
SMB_
ERRinvalidname
SMB_
ERRalreadyexists
SMB_
ERRbadpipe
SMB_
ERRpipebusy
SMB_
ERRpipeclosing
SMB_
ERRnotconnected
SMB_
ERRmoredata
1233
1234
2001
SMB_
ERRerror
4-16
Description
"The buffer is too small to
contain the entry.
No information has been
written to the buffer."
Invalid name.
Object already exists. Returned on attempt to create
file or directory which already
exists on the server.
Pipe invalid
All instances of the requested pipe are busy.
Pipe close in progress.
No process on other end of
pipe.
There is more date to be
returned.
Non-specific error code,
returned under the following
conditions: resource other
than disk space exhausted
(e.g. TIDs), first SMB command was not negotiate,
multiple negotiates attempted,
and internal server error.
Error Code
1002
1004
Description
Check message
Detail
File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when
ing and writing.
the destination shared
folder is read/write protected.
Countermeasure
shared folder is not read/
write protected.
Internal error
SMB_
ERRbadfile
SMB_
ERRnofids
1006
SMB_
ERRbadfid
2250
SMB_
ERRusempx
2251
SMB_
ERRusestd
2252
SMB_
ERRcontmpx
SMB_
ERRnosupport
SMB_
ERRnowrite
2999
3019
3020
SMB_
ERRbadunit
SMB_
ERRnotready
SMB_
ERRbadcmd
SMB_
ERRdata
3021
3022
3023
3024
SMB_
ERRbadreq
SMB_
ERRseek
SMB_
ERRbadmedia
3025
3026
4-17
Description
File not found. The last component of file's pathname
could not be found.
Too many open files. The
server has file handles available.
Invalid file handle. The file
handle specified was not
recognized by the server.
Temporarily unable to support Raw, use MPX mode
Temporarily unable to support Raw, use standard read/
write
Continue in MPX mode
Function not supported
Attempt to write on writeprotected media
Unknown unit
Drive not ready
Unknown command
Data error (CRC)
Bad request structure length
Seek error
Unknown media type
Error Code
3027
3028
3029
Description
Check message
Detail
File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when
ing and writing.
the destination shared
folder is read/write protected.
3030
3031
3034
3035
3036
3039
4000
1005
Login error
Not able to log in.
Cannot login with the

entered user name and
password.
1012
Countermeasure
shared folder is not read/
write protected.
Internal error
SMB_
ERRbadsector
SMB_
ERRnopaper
SMB_
ERRwrite
SMB_
ERRread
SMB_
ERRgeneral
SMB_
ERRwrongdisk
SMB_
ERRFCBUnavail
SMB_
ERRsharebufexc
SMB_
ERRdiskfull
Error requesting file size
SMB_
Check that the entered
user name and password ERRnoacces
are correct.
Check that the entered user
name and password have
authority to write.
SMB_
ERRbadaccess
4-18
Description
Sector not found
Printer out of paper
Write fault
Read fault
General failure
The wrong disk was found in
a driv
No FCBs are available to
process request
A sharing buffer has been
exceeded
The disk is full
Error requesting file attributes
Access denied, the client's
context does not permit the
requested function. This
includes the following conditions: invalid rename command, write to Fid open for
read only, read on Fid open
for write only, attempt to delete a non-empty directory.
Invalid open mode
Error Code
2002
Description
Login error
Check message
Not able to log in.
Detail
password.
2004
2005
Countermeasure
Internal error
SMB_
user name and password ERRbadpw
are correct.
name and password have SMB_
authority to write.
ERRaccess
SMB_
ERRinvtid
SMB_
ERRinvnetname
SMB_
ERRinvdevice
2006
2007
2049
SMB_
ERRqfull
SMB_
ERRqtoobig
SMB_
ERRqeof
SMB_
ERRinvfid
SMB_
ERRsmbcmd
SMB_
ERRsrverror
2050
2051
2052
2064
2065
2067
SMB_
ERRfilespecs
SMB_
ERRbadpermits
2069
4-19
Description
Invalid password - name/
password pair in a Tree
Connect or Session Setup is
invalid.
The client does not have
the necessary access rights
within the specified context
for the requested function.
The TID specified in a command was invalid.
Invalid network name in tree
connect
Invalid device - printer request made to non-printer
connection or non-printer
request made to printer connection.
Print queue full (files) -- returned by open print file
Print queue full -- no space
EOF on print queue dump
Invalid print file FID
The server did not recognize
the command received.
The server encountered an
internal error, e.g. system file
unavailable.
The FID and pathname parameters contained an invalid
combination of values.
The access permissions
specified for a file or directory
are not a valid combination.
The server cannot set the
requested attribute.
Error Code
2071
Description
Login error
Check message
Not able to log in.
2081
Detail
password.
2082
Countermeasure
Internal error
SMB_
user name and password ERRsetattrmode
are correct.
Check that the entered user SMB_
name and password have ERRpaused
SMB_
authority to write.
ERRmsgoff
2083
SMB_
ERRnoroom
2087
SMB_
ERRrmuns
2088
SMB_
ERRtimeout
SMB_
ERRnoresource
SMB_ERR
toomany-uids
2089
2090
2091
SMB_
ERRinvuid
1018
Cannot finde the file in

the shared folder
Not a file to a shared

folder.
1067
Cannot finde the shared Not a shared folder.

folder
Cannot find the specified Check that the file is in the

file in the specified folder. folder.
Cannot find the specified
folder.
4-20
SMB_
ERRnofiles
Check that the folder is set as SMB_

ERRnos-hare
a shared folder.
Description
The attribute mode in the Set
File Attribute request is invalid.
Server paused (reserved for
messaging)
Not receiving messages
(reserved for messaging)
No room to buffer message
(reserved for messaging)
Too many remote user
names (reserved for messaging)
Operation timed out
No resources currently available for request
Too many UIDs active on
this session
The UID is not known as a
valid user identifier on this
session.
A File Search command can
find no more files matching
the specified criteria.
The specified share name
cannot be found on the remote server.
Scan to FTP server transmission result

Error Code
10000
9999
9000
2
Description
Check message
Detail
Transmission completed OK
successfully
System error
System error occurred.
Connection error
Not able to be connected
Countermeasure
An error occurred because Retry is later.

there was a temporary
system memory shortage.
Internal error
Success
FTP error
Internal error
Check DNS server address CURLE_

is set correct at "TCP/IP set- FAILED_INIT
tings".
FTP server name is regisCURLE_
URL_
MALFORMAT
CURLE_
COULDNT_
RESOLVE_
PROXY
CURLE_
COULDNT_
RESOLVE_
HOST
CURLE_
COULDNT_
CONNECT
CURLE_ FTP_
WEIRD_
SERVER_
REPLY
7
8
Description
Very early initialization code

failed. This is likely to be an
internal error or problem. ->
unsupported parameter to
CURLOPT_FTPSSLAUTH
The URL was not properly
formatted. ->No filename
specified for FTP upload/bad
FTP String
Couldn't resolve proxy. The
given proxy host could not
be resolved.
Couldn't resolve host. The
given remote host was not
resolved.
Failed to connect() to host or
proxy.
After connecting to an FTP

server, libcurl expects to get
a certain reply back. This
error code implies that it got
a strange or bad reply. The
given remote server is probably not an OK FTP server.
CURLE_ FTP_ a service was denied by the
ACCESS_
FTP server due to lack of acDENIED
cess - when login fails this is
not returned.
4-21
Error Code
11
Description
Connection error
Check message
Detail
Countermeasure
Internal error

is set correct at "TCP/IP set- FTP_WEIRD_
PASS_REPLY
tings".
FTP server name is registered on DNS server.
13
CURLE_
FTP_WEIRD_
PASV_REPLY
14
CURLE_FTP_
WEIRD_227_
FORMAT
15
CURLE_FTP_
CANT_GET_
HOST
28
CURLE_
OPERATION_
TIMEOUTED
CURLE_FTP_
PORT_
FAILED
30
31
CURLE_FTP_
COULDNT_
USE_REST
36
CURLE_BAD_
DOWNLOAD_
RESUME
CURLE_
ABORTED_
BY_
CALLBACK
CURLE_
SEND_
ERROR
42
55
4-22
Description
After having sent the FTP
password to the server, libcurl expects a proper reply.
This error code indicates that
an unexpected code was
returned.
libcurl failed to get a sensible
result back from the server
as a response to either a
PASV or a EPSV command.
The server is flawed.
FTP servers return a 227line as a response to a PASV
command. If libcurl fails to
parse that line, this return
code is passed back.
An internal failure to lookup
the host used for the new
connection.
The timeout time was
reached.
FTP PORT operation failed.
The FTP PORT command
returned error. This mostly
happen when you haven't
specified a good enough address for libcurl to use.
The REST command failed.
This should never happen if
the server is sane.
Couldn't resume download
Aborted by callback. A callback returned "abort" to
libcurl.
failed sending network data
Error Code
56
63
17
18
Description
Connection error
Check message
Detail
Countermeasure
Internal error

is set correct at "TCP/IP set- RECV_ERROR
tings".
Check that the destination CURLE_
FTP server name is regis- FILESIZE_
EXCEEDED
CURLE_FTP_
File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination
ing and writing.
the destination FTP server FTP server is not write pro- COULDNT_
SET_BINARY
is write protected.
tected.
CURLE_
PARTIAL_
FILE
19
CURLE_FTP_
COULDNT_
RETR_FILE
21
CURLE_FTP_
QUOTE_ ERROR
23
CURLE_
WRITE_
ERROR
4-23
Description
Failure in receiving network
data
Maximum file size exceeded
Couldn't set desired mode
A file transfer was shorter or
larger than expected. This
happens when the server
first reports an expected
transfer size, and then
delivers data that doesn't
match the previously given
size. (result != 226 Transfer complete, result != 250
Requested file action okay,
completed.)
This was either a weird reply
to a 'RETR' command or a
zero byte transfer complete.
When sending custom
"QUOTE" commands to the
remote server, one of the
commands returned an error
code that was 400 or higher
(for FTP) or otherwise indicated unsuccessful completion of the command.
An error occurred when writing received data to a local
file, or an error was returned
to libcurl from a write callback.
Error Code
25
Description
Check message
Detail
Countermeasure
File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination
ing and writing.
the destination FTP server FTP server is not write prois write protected.
tected.
25
CURLE_
UPLOAD_
FAILED
CURLE_FTP_
COULDNT_
STOR_FILE
CURLE_
READ_ ERROR
CURLE_OUT_
OF_MEMORY
26
27
67
Internal error
Login error
Not able to log in.

password.
4-24

name and password are correct.
CURLE_
LOGIN_
DENIED
Description
Failed starting the upload.
For FTP, the server typically
denied the STOR command.
The error buffer usually contains the server's explanation
to this. (This error code was
formerly known as CURLE_
FTP_COULDNT_STOR_
FILE.)
same as CURLE_UPLOAD_
FAILED
Could open/read from file
A memory allocation request
failed. This is serious badness and things are severely
screwed up if this ever occur.
User: password or similar
was not accepted and we
failed to login
4.5 Image quality problems

Go through the following steps to solve the problem:
1. Check the machine parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves.
2. Adjust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> and select
[Background level], and press <Start>.) Clean the document glass and document pad in advance.
3. Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (scanner section) or the output system (printer
section):

1. Make copy full size copy of a document
(Original)
(Copy)
2. Make a reduction copy of the document.
(Original)
(Copy) - Input system cause : scanner
(Original)
(Copy) - Output system cause: printer
4-25
4.5.1 Typical fault images

1. Blank image
2. Black iamge
3. Low image density / rough image
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4. Dark image density
5. Blank lines/ Blank spots
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
7. Black lines
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
10. Gradation reproduction failure
8. Black spots
6. Void areas
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
9. Smear on back
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
11. Periodically uneven image
4-26
A
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
12. Uneven image density
4.5.2 Blank image

Scanner section
Section
Step Check items
Result
Scanner section 1 Is the scanner drive transmission
NO
mechanism in good condition?
2 Do the connection from CCD
NO
Scanner board Main control board
LPH board LPH connect board
LED unit remain intact?
3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty?
YES
4
Is the trouble settled with above

steps?
NO
Remedy
Check and change as
necessary.
Reconnect / Replace harness.
Clean or replace the parts, and

adjust the background level.
1. Replace scanner board.
2. Replace main control board.
3. Replace LPH board.
4. Replace LPH connect board.
5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Step Check items
Result
Toner cartridge
1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly?
NO
2
Drum cartridge
Circuit boards
Transfer section
5
6
Is the developing bias or supply bias

contact terminal dirty or deformed?
Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact
terminal, or drum ground contact
terminal dirty or deformed?
Are the connections from LPH to
high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board
in good condition?
(Check plugs firmly plugged and
snapped harness)
Is the transfer bias contact terminal
dirty or deformed?
steps?
4-27
YES
Remedy
Correct / Replace drive
coupling mechanism of toner
cartridge and machine.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Clean. / Replace.
YES
Clean. / Replace.
NO
Reconnect. / Replace harness.
YES
Clean. / Replace.
NO
1. Replace toner cartridge.

2. Replace drum cartridge.
3. Replace LPH.
7. Replace high-voltage power
board.
8. Replace transfer roller unit.
4.5.3 Black image

Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
Does the LED lamp turn ON when
making copy with open platen cover?
2
3
4
5
6
7
Did 24V output between P2 pin 1 and

4 on Scanner board, when performing
the operation of step 1?
Did 24V output between P4 pin 16
and 18 on Scanner board, when performing the operation of step 1?
Did 24V turn ON and OFF at P3 pin 2
on CCD board, when performing the
operation of step 1?
Are the mirrors and lens installed
properly?
Are the mirrors and lens dirty?
steps?
Result Remedy
YES Check step 5 and onward.
NO
Reconnect / Replace harness.
NO
Replace main control board.
NO
Replace scanner board.
YES
Replace LED lamp board.
NO
Replace scanner unit.
NO
Install them properly.
YES
Clean or replace the parts, and

4. Replace LPH.
NO
Printer section
Section
Drum cartridge
Circuit boards
Step Check item

Result Remedy
1
Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES Clean. / Replace.
2
NO
in good condition?
snapped harness)
3
NO
steps?
2. Replace LPH.
board.
4-28
4.5.4 Low image density / rough image
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Is the scanner drive transmission
Scanner section 1
mechanism in good condition?
2
Are the document glass, back plate
and ADF glass dirty?
3
4
5
Result Remedy
NO
Check and change as
necessary.
YES Clean the parts, and adjust the
background level.
YES Clean or replace the parts, and
Is the platen cover floating by copying YES Copy with opened platen cover.
a thick volume?
Do the connection from CCD
NO
Reconnect / Replace harness
NO
steps?
5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
LPH
Step Check item

1
Is the lens dirty?
Toner cartridge 2
Drum cartridge
Transfer section 4
Circuit boards
5
6
Result Remedy
YES Clean.

Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact
dirty or deformed?
Is the transfer roller gap dirty?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
4-29
YES
Clean. / Replace.
YES
Clean. / Replace.
YES
Clean. / Replace.
YES
NO
Clean. / Replace.
Reconnect. / Replace the
harness.
Toner sensor
error
7
8
Is the toner sensor working?

(Use Sensor input test mode and
check that the sensor is working.)
steps?
4-30
NO
Reconnect. / Replace sensor.
NO

3. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.5 Dark image density
Scanner section
Section
Scanner
Step Check item

Result Remedy
1
Are the ADF glass and document YES Clean the parts, and adjust the
glass dirty?
background level.
2
Is the platen cover floating by copying YES Copy with opened platen cover.
a thick volume?
3
YES Clean or replace the parts, and
4
Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? YES Clean. / Replace.
5
Is the connection from LED lamp to
NO
CCD board in good condition?
6
Is the connection from CCD board to
NO
scanner board in good condition?
7
Is the connection from scanner
NO
board to main control board in good
condition?
NO
8
Is the connection from main control
board to high-voltage power board in
good condition?
Printer section
Section
Step Check item
Result Remedy
Toner cartridge 1
Is the developing or bias supply bias
YES Clean. / Replace.
Drum cartridge 2
Is the charge wire dirty?
YES Clean.
3
Circuit boards 4
NO
in good condition?
snapped harness)
5
YES 1. Replace toner cartridge.
steps?
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-31
4.5.6 Blank lines
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and
document glass dirty?
2

steps?
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
If the trouble is not settled by
cleaning, adjust the background
level.
NO
NO

5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Step Check item
Result Remedy
LED unit
1
Is the LED dirty?
YES Clean.
Toner cartridge 2
Is the toner layer on the developing
NO
Replace.
roller normal?
Fusing unit
3
Is the fusing roller or separation
scraper dirty or damaged?
Drum cartridge 4
Is the separation sheet dirty or
damaged?
Circuit boards 5
NO
in good condition?
snapped harness)
Transfer section 6
Is the transfer roller dented or
YES Replace.
damaged?
Discharge plate 7
Is the discharge plate deformed?
YES Replace.
8
NO
steps?
2. Replace the fusing unit.
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-32
4.5.7 Void areas
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
2

steps?
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
If the trouble is not settled
by cleaning, adjust the
background level.
NO
NO

5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Step Check item
Result Remedy
LED unit
1
Is the LED dirty?
YES Clean.
Toner cartridge 2
Is the toner layer on the developing
NO
Replace.
roller normal?
Fusing unit
3
Is the fusing roller dirty or damaged?
Drum cartridge 4
Is the drum cartridge dirty or
damaged?
Circuit boards 5
NO
in good condition?
snapped harness)
YES Replace.
Transfer section 7
damaged?
8
Is the transfer roller gap dirty?
Discharge plate 9
YES Replace.
9
NO
steps?
2. Replace fusing unit.
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-33
4.5.8 Black lines
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
2

steps?
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
background level.
NO
NO

5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Paper path
Drum cartridge
Fusing unit
Step
1
2
3
4
Toner cartridge 5
Circuit boards
Check item
Is paper path dirty with toner?
Is the drum dirty or damaged?
Is the developing roller dirty or
damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
steps?
4-34
Result
YES
YES
YES
YES
Remedy
Clean.
Clean.
Replace.
Clean. / Replace.
YES
Replace.
NO
NO

4. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.9 Black spots
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
2

steps?
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
background level.
NO
NO

5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Paper path
Drum cartridge
Fusing unit
Step
1
2
3
4
Toner cartridge 5
Circuit boards
Check item
Is there any cleaning trouble?
Is the developing roller dirty or damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
steps?
4-35
Result
YES
YES
YES
YES
Remedy
Clean.
Replace.
Replace.
Clean. / Replace.
YES
Replace.
NO
NO

4. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.10 Smear on back
Printer section
Section
Paper path
Fusing unit
Step Check item

1
2
Transfer section 3
damaged?
Circuit boards 4
in good condition?
snapped harness)
5
steps?
4-36
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
YES
Replace.
NO
NO

board.
4.5.11 Gradation reproduction failure
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
Is the shading sheet under the
contact cover dirty?
2
Are the document glass, back plate,

and ADF glass dirty?

steps?
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
background level.
YES Clean.
background level.
NO
NO

5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Step Check item
Result Remedy
Toner cartridge 1
Drum cartridge 2
YES Clean.
3
Circuit boards 4
NO
in good condition?
snapped harness)
4
NO
steps?
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-37
4.5.12 Periodically uneven image
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
Is the FBS motor drive gear cracked
or dirty with foreign object?
2
Is the scanner motor secured
properly?
3
Is the carriage adjusting part secured
properly?
4
Is the carriage secured properly to
the belt?
5
Are the FBS belt attached loosely?
6
Are the scanner rails damaged or
dirty with foreign object?
7
8
steps?
Result Remedy
NO
Secure properly.
NO
Secure properly.
NO
Secure properly.
YES
YES
Adjust the belt tension.

Clean. / Replace.
NO
NO

5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Step Check item
Result Remedy
Toner cartridge 1
Is the toner cartridge driven properly?
NO
Correct. / Replace drive
Replace toner cartridge.
Drum cartridge 2
Are the drum and transfer roller
NO
driven properly?
coupling mechanism of drum
Replace drive coupling
mechanism of transfer roller
and machine.
Paper path
3
Is the resist roller driven properly?
NO
coupling mechanism.
Fusing unit
4
Is the fusing unit driven properly?
NO
coupling mechanism.
5
NO
steps?
4-38
4.5.13 Uneven image density
Scanner section
Section
Step Check item
Scanner section 1
2
3
4
Result Remedy
YES Clean.
background level.
Is the shading sheet under the
YES Clean.
contact cover dirty?
background level.
Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? YES Clean. / Replace.
NO
NO
steps?
5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Section
Step Check item
Result Remedy
Toner cartridge 1
Is the toner cartridge driven properly?
NO
Replace the toner cartridge.
2
contact terminal dirty or deformed?)
3
Is the gap roller dirty or broken?
Drum cartridge 4
YES Clean.
5
YES Replace.
Fusing unit
6
Is the fusing roller dirty or damaged?
Transfer section 7
dirty or deformed?
8
YES Replace.
damaged?
Discharge plate 9
YES Replace.
NO
Circuit boards 10
in good condition?
snapped harness)
4-39
11

steps?
4-40
NO

4. Replace LPH.
board.
4.6 Document trouble

Mechanical Errors
While
feeding a
document
Symptom
The ADF does not feed the
document.
While
The feeder stops the feedscanning ing job while the document
document is taken into the feeder.
The document is stuck and

gets damaged while taken
into the feeder.
Possible Cause
The pickup roller is dirty or worn
out.
The power of the separation
roller is getting decrease. The
separation pad pressure does
not match the paper quality.
The motor is not rotating.
The malfunction of the sensor.
The motor power is not working
properly.
The roller is dirty.
The roller is worn out.
Foreign objects entered the feed
area.
The paper quality is not acceptable.
The paper shape is not acceptable.
4-41
Countermeasure
Clean the roller.
Replace the roller.
Adjust the separation pressure.
Clean the roller.
Replace the motor.

Replace the sensor.
Replace the motor.
Clean the roller.
Replace the roller.
Remove the objects.
Recommend the customer to use
the document glass.
Sensor Malfunctions
Symptom
While
No beep sound when you
feeding a place the document.
document (The beep sound volume
setting could be OFF.)
Possible Cause
DS1 sensor defect
APS sensor defect
While
The machine feeds the
DS2 sensor defect
feeding
document through the ADF
document without scanning.
While
scanning
a document
The scan starting and ending area are not correct.
While a
The LCD shows a warndocument ing while a document exits
exits
after scanning.
DS1 or DS2 sensor

defect
Countermeasure
0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor
input test mode.
1 Confirm the LCD indication changes by moving the
DS1 sensor.
OFF: No document / ON: Document
2C
heck the sensor harness is firmly connected.
3 If
the LCD indication does not change, replace the
DS1 sensor.
4 Replace the sensor harness.
5 Replace the main control board.
input test mode.
1C
onfirm that the LCD indication changes by opening
and closing the platen cover.
OFF: Cover Open / ON: Document
2C
3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the
APS sensor.
input test mode.
1C
the ADF cover and inserting a paper.
OFF: No document / ON: Document
2C
DS2 sensor.
Check DS1 sensor defect and DS2 sensor defect in
that order.
The LCD shows a warning

after a document exits.
Others
The message, Please

close the flashing cover.
is displayed on the LCD.
TXIL sensor defect
The flashing cover: The

ADF cover
4-42

input test mode.
1C
and closing the ADF cover.
OFF : Cover open / ON: Cover close
2C
TXIL sensor.
5 Replace the connect board.
Scanning trouble
Symptom
Possible Cause
The belt has not been firmly inserted

into the belt holder.
The lamp
Harness is not firmly inserted to the
does not turn connector.
on
LED lamp board defect.
LED lamp board harness defect.
CCD board defect.
Harness between CCD board and
scanner board defect.
Scanner board defect.
The carriage HS sensor defect.
is touching
the home
side (on the
left toward
the front)
Countermeasure
An unusual noise occurs.
Check the belt.
While scanning
Check the connectors.
The carriage FBS motor defect.

does not
move.
Scanner board defect.
4-43
Replace.
Replace.
Replace the carriage.
Replace the harness.
Replace the scanner board.
0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor input test mode.
1 Remove the document glass and move
the carriage by hand, and confirm that
the LCD indication changes.
OFF: N
ot home position
ON : H
ome position
2 Check the sensor harness is firmly
connected.
3 If the LCD indication does not change,
replace the HS sensor.
5 Replace the scanner board.
6 Replace the harness between scanner
board and main control board.
1C
heck the motor harness is firmly connected.
2 Replace the FBS motor.
1C
heck the connectors are firmly connected to the scanner board.
2 Replace the harness between scanner
board and main control board.
3 Replace the scanner board.
4.7 Recording Paper Jam

After removing the jammed paper, please open and close the side cover.
Mechanical errors
Symptom
Possible cause
Countermeasure
Jam in the
paper supply
area
Faulty movement of some cassette Check each movement of a cassette part.

parts.
Replace the faulty part.
Paper is stuck in the recording
area.
Remove the stuck paper.
The paper feed roller is worn out.
Replace the roller.
Jam in the feed Paper is stuck in the feed area.

area
Remove the jammed paper.
Jam in the
Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper Remove the jammed paper.
fuser or the
exit area.
paper exit area
The fuser roller is not clean.
Clean the fuser roller.
Replace the fuser roller.
Electrical errors
Symptom
Possible cause
Countermeasure
The paper supply electromagnetic

Jam in the feed
clutch does not work.
area
Please close the
flashing cover.
The paper supply sensor (PSS) does
not work.
Check the wiring.

Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch.
Replace the main control board.
The malfunction of the PPS.

Jam in the feed
area
Please close the
flashing cover.
Check that the wiring and actuator are working

properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS, or
the main control board.
Check that the wiring and actuator are working

properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS, or
Main control board.
Jam in the feed

area
Check paper
size.....
The paper size is not correct.
Check the paper, size setting.
Jam in the fuser

or paper exit
area
The paper discharge sensor (PDS)

does not work.
Check that the wiring and actuators are working

properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PDS, or
LPH board.
4-44
4.8 Machine malfunction

No. Symptom
What to confirm
1. Is the machine in energy save mode? Yes
The LCD shows

nothing.
Countermeasure
No
2. Is the power cable plugged correctly? Yes
No
3. Is the power switch On?
Yes
No
4. D
oes the DC output voltages from
Yes
the power supply unit to connector
No
P3 on the main control boar have the
following output?
Press the energy save key, and release

the mode.
Check No.2.
Check No.3.
Plug the cable correctly.
Check No.4.
Power on.
Check No.5.
Replace the power supply.
Pin 7, 9
+3.3 V
Pin 15, 17
+5.0 V
Pin 2, 4, 6
+12.0V
Pin 12, 14
+24.0V
P i n 1 , 3 , 5 , GND
8, 10, 11, 13,
19, 21, 23
The LCD shows

Please close
the flashing
cover.
5. Is the following connection OK?

LCD assembly to the Panel PCB. (P8)
Panel PCB (P1:) to the harness to the
main control board. (P5A)
6. If you replace the panel board, the
symptom will be fixed.
7. If you replace the main board, the
1. If you close the flashing cover, the
2. Is the cover secured firmly by
screws?
3. Is the message shown after energy
save mode is released?
4. Does the LPH board P93-8 have
+24V output?
5. P
ress the sensor in the message and
check the output changes to +3V
through GND. (The interlock +24V
through GND.)
Interlock : L
PH board P93-11
JAMC1 : L
PH board P93-3
JAMC2: M
ain control board P17-7
ADF cover: Main control board P82-1
6. If you replace LPH board or the connecting harness, the message will
disappear.
7. If you replace the main control board,
the symptom will be fixed.
4-45
Yes
No
Check No.6.
Reconnect the connection or replace
the harness.
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Replace the panel board.

Check No.7.
Replace the machine.
Solved.
Check No.2.
Check No.3.
Secure the cover properly.
Check No.4.
Check No.5.
Check No.5.
Check No.6.
Replace the sensor or the harness.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Check No.6.
Check No.6.
Check No.7.
Check No.7.
Replace the circuit board or the harness.
Check No.7.
Yes
No
No
3
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
Documents jam 1. Did you feed a single document?

frequently.
The LCD shows
2. D
id you use thin paper or conPlease reset
verted
paper?
the document.
Yes Check No. 2.

No Check No. 3
Yes Recommend the customer to use the document glass.
No Check No. 8.
3. D
id you set documents more than
the capacity?
Yes Check No. 4.

No Check No. 5.
4. If you set documents within the

capacity, the symptom be fixed.
Yes Solved.
No Check No. 5.
5. Did you use wrinkled or curled

documents?
Yes Recommend the customer to use the document glass.

No Check No. 6.
6. D
oes the machine still feed documents?
Yes Check No. 7.

No Check No. 8.
7. D
oes the machine still discharge
documents?
Yes Check No. 23.

No Check No. 24.
8. Does the clutch rotate properly?
Yes Check No. 9.

No Replace the clutch.
9. Does the separate roller work

properly?
Yes Check No. 11.

No Check No. 10.
10. Does the transfer gear work

properly?
Yes Check No. 11.

No Adjust the gear.
11. Does the ADF motor rotate properly?
Yes Check No. 12.

No Replace the ADF motor.
12. Is the separation pad pressure

appropriate?
Yes Check No. 13.

No Adjust the separation pad pressure.
13. Do CN201-4, 5, 6 and 7 of the

power supply have +24V output?
Yes Check No. 14.

No Replace the power supply.
14. If you replace the harness

between the power supply and
main control board, the message
will disappear.
Yes Replace the harness between the power

supply and main control board.
No Check No. 15.
15. Do P3-12, 14, 16, and 18 on the

main control board have +24V
output ?
Yes Check No. 16.

No Replace the main control board.
16. Has the DS1 sensor been

installed properly?
Yes Check No. 17.

No Re-install it properly.
17. D
oes the feeler for the DS1 sensor work properly?
Yes Check No. 18.

No Replace the DS1 sensor feeler.
18. Does the feeler for the DS2 sensor work properly?
Yes Check No. 19.

No Replace the DS2 sensor feeler.
19. A
re there any foreign objects
stuck around paper guides?
Yes Remove the objects.

No Check No. 20.
20. Does the voltage level of P82-. on

the main control panel change to
+0V when the DS1 is ON, and to
+5V when the DS1 is OFF?
Yes Check No. 22.

No Check No. 21.
21. If you replace the DS1 sensor, the

Yes Replace the DS1.

No Replace the main control board.
4-46
No.
3
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
Yes
No
Check No. 23.

Check No. 24.
Yes
No
Replace the DS2.

24. Is the separation roller dirty?
Yes
No
Replace the separation roller.

Check No. 25.
25. Is the separation pad dirty?
Yes
No
Replace the separation pad.

Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Re-adjust the guides properly.
2. Did you place different size documents at the same time?
Yes
No
Set only the same size documents.

Check No. 3.
3. A
re there any foreign objects on the
paper pass?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 4.
4. Have the separator roller and the

pad separator been worn out?
Yes
No
Replace them.
Check No. 5.
5. Are there any problems with on

the installations and operations of
the separator roller and the pad
separator?
Yes
No
Check their operations.

Check No. 6.
6. Is the guide outer deformed?
Yes
No
Fix or replace it.

1. Are they thin documents?
Yes
No
Recommend customer to use the document glass.

Check No. 2.
2. Are there any foreign objects on the

document tray?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 3.
3. Do the documents get wrinkled or

torn around the feeding entry area?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Check No. 6.
4. H
as the entry area of the guide
outer been deformed?
Yes
No
Repair or replace it.

Check No. 7.
5. Is the separation pad dirty?
Yes
No
Replace the separation pad.

Documents jam 22. Does the voltage level of P82-6 on

the main control panel change to
frequently.
+0V when the DS2 is ON, and to
The LCD shows
+5V when the DS2 is OFF?
Please reset the
document.
23. If you replace the DS2 sensor, the
Documents skew 1. Have the document guides been

adjusted properly?
Documents get
wrinkled or torn
frequently.
4-47
No.
6
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
The warning mes- 1. Has the lamp been illuminated?

sage Lamp error.
Call for service.
2. Is the CCD harness connecting coris displayed.
rectly?
The message No
Paper is displayed.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Check No. 7.
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Connect the harness.
3. A
re the sheet document press or
back ground level plate dirty?
Yes
No
Clean, or replace them.

Check No. 4.
4. A
re the document glass or the mirrors dirty?
Yes
No
Clean, or replace them.

Check No. 5.
5. Are the mirror carriage belts or the

home sensor attached correctly?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Reattach them.
6. If you replace the home sensor or

the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 7.
7. If you replace the LED lamp board

or the connecting harness, the
Yes
Replace the carriage or the harness.

Check No. 8.
8. If you replace the carriage or the

connecting harness, the symptom
will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the circuit board or the harness.

Check No. 9.
9. If you replace the main control board

or the connecting harness, the
Yes
No

1. D
id you load paper in the cassette
properly?
Yes
No
Check No.2.
Re-load paper.
2. P
ress the paper detection feeler
when the machine is in ready
mode, and check the sensor output
changes to +3V through GND.
Cassette 1 : M
ain control board
P14-4
Cassette 2 : Main control board
P15-4
Yes
No
Yes
No

Check No. 3.
Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the main control

board, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No

Yes
No
Remove the paper.

Check No. 2.
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Replace the PSS sensor or the connecting harness.
Paper jams or the 1. Is there any paper jam on the paper
pass?
message Open
the flashing cover 2. Is there electrical continuity in the
a n d c h e ck . . . . . .
harness between the PSS sensor
is displayed.
and the main control board?
No
3. Is there electrical continuity in the

harness between the PDS sensor
and the LPH board?
YES Check No. 4.

NO Replace the connecting harness.
4. Is there electrical continuity in the

harness between the main control
board and the LPH board?
YES Check No. 5.

NO Replace the connecting harness.
5. If you replace the PSS sensor or

the PDS sensor, the message will
disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the sensor.

Check No. 6.
6. If you replace the LPH board, the

message will disappear?
(PDS sensor only)
Yes
No
Replace the LPHboard.

Check No. 7.

board, the message will disappear.
Yes
No

4-48
No.
9
Symptom
Paper skew.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. If you re-load the document and make

more than 10 copies, paper skew still
occurs.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Solved.
2. Has the paper cassette been installed

properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Re-install it properly.
3. Does the cassette have any malfunctions?
Yes
No
Replace the cassette.

1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the

image will expands more vertically
than horizontally.
Note: The following causes are also
possible. The sender sent the
document data using unsuitable
documents like excessively thick
paper, no carbon paper, rear
carbon paper, and so on.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
The senders problem.
(It might be caused by using unsuitable documents, or sender transmission problems.)

Yes
No

1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the

image is more compressed vertically
than horizontally.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
(It might be caused by sender transmission problems.)
2. If you pull out a paper from resist roller

and the fuser, the resistance is normal.
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Clean resist roller. Replace resist
roller or the fuser.
3. The electromagnetic clutch is normal.
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Replace the electromagnetic clutch.

Yes
No

12 The printouts are 1. A

re copied and test print images too
too light.
light, or uneven density?
Note: The following causes are also
possible. The contrast setting might be not appropriate.
Contrast irregularities are likely
on printouts of documents containing thin lines or small blue
lettering.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
(Possible causes are inappropriate
contrast setting, using colored documents, poor line connection, using
unsuitable documents, or sender
transmission problems.)
Yes
Replace the toner or the drum cartridge.

Refer to the Image Quality Problems.
10 When using the

auto feeder, the
reception image
expanded.
11 When using the

auto feeder, the
reception image
compressed.
2. If you replace the toner or the drum

cartridge, the symptom will be fixed.
No
13 Clock malfunction
1. A
re there any errors in the clock setting process?
Yes
No
Follow the instruction manual.

Check No. 2.

Yes
No

4-49
No. Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
15 The machine
does not receive
or send a FAX.
1. Is the machine verifying the password?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Check No. 3.
2. Is the password correct?
Yes
Stop using the password verification,

then check No. 3.
Enter the correct password.
No
3. Does the machine communicate with
a right working machine?
Yes
No
16 The auto memory reception

does not work.
17 A dial signal
output fails after
entering the
number from the
numeric keys.
18 The line monitor

does not work.
The operation might wrong, or counter

machine might have problem.
Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the NCU board or the

connecting harness, the symptom will
be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the NCU board or the harness.

Check No. 5.

Yes
No

1. H
as the auto reception been set?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Set auto reception mode.

be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 3.

Yes
No

1. Has the line type setting been set

correctly ?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Set the correct line type.

be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 3.

Yes
No

1. Has the volume setting been set to

OFF?
Yes
No
Set the volume except OFF.

Check No. 2.
2. H
as the setting for the line monitor
been set up?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Set up the setting.
3. If you replace the speaker or the connecting harness, the symptom will be
fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the speaker or the harness.

Check No. 3.

Yes
No

4-50
No.
Symptom
19 An unusual
sound occurs.
20 The document
memory can not
be backed up.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. Does the sound occur during scanning?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Check No. 10.
2. D
oes the sound occur during scanning using the ADF or document glass
?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Check No. 6.
3. Are there any objects interfering with

the roller or roller shaft?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 4.
4. Has the ADF motor sounded abnormal?
Yes
No
Clean the roller. Check the harness.

Check No. 5.

the ADF gear?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 6.
6. H
as the FBS motor sounded abnormal?
Yes
No
Check the harness.

Check No. 7.

the FBS gear?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 8.

the FBS pulley?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 9.

the mirror carriage traveling surface?
Yes
No
Remove the objects using lint free

waste.
Check No. 10.
10. Does the sound occur while recording?
Yes
No
Check No. 11.

Check No. 17.
11. If you remove the drum or toner cartridge, the sound still occurs.
Yes
No
Check No. 12.

Replace the toner or drum cartridge.

the drum gear, developing gear, or
transfer gear?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 13.
13. If you replace the toner or drum cartridge, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
Replace the toner or drum cartridge.
No
Check No. 14.
14. If you replace the transfer roller or

fuser, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the transfer roller or fuser.

Check No. 15.

the driving mechanism?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 16.

board, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No

1. Have the main control board and the

battery been connected to P81?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Connect it.
2. Is the battery voltage above +3V

when the machine in shut down?
Yes
No
Check No. 5.
Check No. 3.
3. Did you charge the battery for more

than 24 hours?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Charge the battery.
4. If you replace the battery, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the battery.

Check No. 5.

Yes
No

4-51
No.
Symptom
21 Unit will not

power up.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. Is the power cord connected correct

and power switch is turned on.
Yes
No
Check No.2.
Connect the power cord and turn the
power on.
2. Is the electrical outlet is on?
Yes
No
Check No.3.
Connect the machine to a proper
outlet.
3. D
oes the DC output voltages from the
power supply unit to connector P3 on
the main control boar have the following output?
Yes
No
Check No.4.
Replace the power supply.
4. Is the connection between the power

supply unit and the main control board
OK?
Yes
No
Check No.5.
Reconnect the connection or replace
the harness.
5. If you replace the main board, the

Yes
No

Pin 7, 9
+3.3 V
Pin 15, 17
+5.0 V
Pin 2, 4, 6
+12.0V
Pin 12, 14
+24.0V
P i n 1 , 3 , 5 , GND
8, 10, 11, 13,
19, 21, 23
4-52
5 Maintenance & Adjustment

5.1 Maintenance schedule
Scanning Section
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Clean
Replace
Covers
Touch panel display
ADF glass
See Administratorss Guide

Document glass
Platen cover
Platen cover pad
Mirrors *1
60,000 sheets/A4 or
Assy Piece Separator *2
Wipe it with a soft cloth
2 years
dampened with water.
60,000
sheets/A4 or
Roller Separate *2
If that does not clean the
2 years
part, wipe it first with a soft
60,000 sheets/A4 or
Roller Pickup *2
cloth dampened with natu2 years
ral detergent, then wipe it
Roller Feed / Roller Press
with a soft cloth dampened

Roller Exit ADF / Roller Press
with water.
20,000 hours (light
Lamp
intensity: 70%)
*1 means to clean the parts when image quality problems occurs.
*2 Replace these parts at the same time.
Parts Name
Reference
Page
See Administratorss
Guide
5-30
5-16
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-15
5-28
Printer Section
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Clean
Replace
Parts Name
Printer head
Pull the cleaning rod
60,000 sheets/A4 or
2 years
60,000 sheets/A4 or
2 years
Roller Pickup *3
Assy Piece Pressure *3
Roller Feed (Cassette 2) / Roller
Press
Roller Feed Duplex / Roller Press
Wipe it with a soft cloth

dampened with alcohol.
Roller Pickup MP
Pad Pressure MP
Roller Register / Roller Press
Roller Exit/ Roller Press
Fuser
Roller Transfer
Filter VOC
*3 Replace these parts at the same time.
60,000 sheets/A4 or
2 years
60,000 sheets/A4 or
2 years
100,000 sheets/
A4
60,000 sheets/A4
TBD
Reference
Page
See Users
Guide
5-82
5-83
5-87
5-72
5-67
5-67
5-63
5-71
5-68
5-60
5-81
Note
The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to the
environment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The maintenance
cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be needed to maintain
the machine quality.
5-1
5.2 Disassembly procedures

Before assembling,
Disconnect the power cable
Disconnect the line cable and other cables
Pull out the toner cartridge from the machine
Pull out the drum cartridge from the machine, and cover it with a black clothe
5.2.1 ADF section....................................................................................................................... 5-4

TRAY DOCUMENT..............................................................................................................................5-4
COVER CONNECT..............................................................................................................................5-5
COVER PLATEN..................................................................................................................................5-6
COVER TX SIDE B..............................................................................................................................5-7
COVER TX SIDE F..............................................................................................................................5-8
GUIDE INNER A..................................................................................................................................5-9
GUIDE OUTER..................................................................................................................................5-10
ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR..............................................................................................................5-11
ROLLER PICKUP/ROLLER SEPARATOR........................................................................................5-12
ROLLER FEED..................................................................................................................................5-13
ROLLER EXIT ADF............................................................................................................................5-15
ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR...............................................................................................................5-16
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-17
SENSOR TXIL....................................................................................................................................5-18
ADF DRIVE GEARS...........................................................................................................................5-19
SENSOR (APS)..................................................................................................................................5-20
SENSOR DS1/DS2............................................................................................................................5-21
Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS...................................................................................5-22
5.2.2 Scanner section............................................................................................................... 5-23

ASSY COVER CONTACT..................................................................................................................5-23
ASSY COVER TOP............................................................................................................................5-24
FRAME SCANNER FBS....................................................................................................................5-25
SENSOR HS......................................................................................................................................5-27
PCB LED-LAMP FBS.........................................................................................................................5-28
HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE...................................................................................................................5-29
MIRROR A/B/C..................................................................................................................................5-30
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-31
PCB SCANNER.................................................................................................................................5-33
5.2.3 Panel section................................................................................................................... 5-34

PANEL................................................................................................................................................5-34
DISPLAY (LCD)..................................................................................................................................5-35
SPEAKER..........................................................................................................................................5-37
PCB PANEL.......................................................................................................................................5-38
PCB PANEL KEY1/KEY2...................................................................................................................5-39
5.2.4 PCB section..................................................................................................................... 5-40

PCB PDL............................................................................................................................................5-40
POWER-SUPPLY..............................................................................................................................5-41
PCB IS................................................................................................................................................5-42
PCB LPH............................................................................................................................................5-43
PCB MAIN..........................................................................................................................................5-44
PCB NCU...........................................................................................................................................5-45
PCB PSU............................................................................................................................................5-46
PCB CONNECT LPH.........................................................................................................................5-47
5.2.5 Printer section.................................................................................................................. 5-49

TRAY A MP/MP FLAPPER PAD........................................................................................................5-49
COVER FRONT.................................................................................................................................5-50
COVER OPTION/COVER SHIELD....................................................................................................5-51
COVER BACK....................................................................................................................................5-52
COVER JAM ACCESS.......................................................................................................................5-53
SOLENOID.........................................................................................................................................5-54
CLUTCH.............................................................................................................................................5-55
RX MOTOR........................................................................................................................................5-56
5-2
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-57
FRAME DRIVE/GEARS.....................................................................................................................5-58
ROLLER TRANSFER.........................................................................................................................5-60
ROLLER REGISTER..........................................................................................................................5-63
SENSOR TRAYS...............................................................................................................................5-64
SENSOR JAMC1...............................................................................................................................5-65
SENSOR PSS....................................................................................................................................5-66
ROLLER PICKUP MP/PAD PRESSURE MP.....................................................................................5-67
PRINTER FUSER..............................................................................................................................5-68
ASSY INTERLOCK............................................................................................................................5-69
SENSOR PDS/DPS...........................................................................................................................5-70
ROLLER EXIT....................................................................................................................................5-71
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX...................................................................................................................5-72
TONER SENSOR (PCB TOS) ..........................................................................................................5-74
SENSOR PES1..................................................................................................................................5-77
SENSOR OPEN1...............................................................................................................................5-78
PRINTER HEAD.................................................................................................................................5-79
FILTER VOC......................................................................................................................................5-81
5.2.6 Paper feeding section...................................................................................................... 5-82

ROLLER PICKUP (1st CST)/(2nd CST).............................................................................................5-82
ASSY PIECE PRESSURE (1st CST)/(2nd CST)...............................................................................5-83
PIECE COVER CST (1st CST paper dust)........................................................................................5-84
SENSOR JAMC2...............................................................................................................................5-85
SENSOR PES2..................................................................................................................................5-86
ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST).........................................................................................................5-87
PLATE FRAME B...............................................................................................................................5-88
ASSY SHAFT JOINT (2nd CST)........................................................................................................5-89
SOLENOID (2nd CST).......................................................................................................................5-90
SENSOR OPEN2...............................................................................................................................5-91
5-3
5.2.1 ADF section

TRAY DOCUMENT
1. Release one hook [2] from the Cover platen [1].
2. Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-4
COVER CONNECT
1. Remove one screw [1], then remove the COVER CONNECT [2].
2. Disconnect the connector [3] from the Plate PCL.
[1]
[3]
[2]
Important
When attaching the Cover connect, be careful not to pinch the harness.
5-5
COVER PLATEN
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT)

Remove one screw [1].
Open the Cover platen [2], and lift upwards.
Tilt the Cover platen [2] back a little and release the hook [4] on the Hinge [3]. Then, remove the COVER
PLATEN [2].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
5-6
COVER TX SIDE B
1. Open the Cover platen [1].
2. Remove one screw [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Close the Cover platen [1].

4. Open the Guide outer [3].
5. Release one hook [4], then remove the COVER TX SIDE B [5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
5-7
COVER TX SIDE F
2. Remove one screw [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Close the Cover platen [1].

4. Open the Guide outer [3].
5. Release one hook [4], then remove the COVER TX SIDE F [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
5-8
GUIDE INNER A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the Tray document. (See TRAY DOCUMENT)

Remove the Cover TX side B. (See COVER TX SIDE B)
Remove the Cover TX side F. (See COVER TX SIDE F)
Cut the Cable tie [2].
Remove two screws [3], and remove the APS bracket [4].
Remove two screws [5].
Release one hook [6], then remove the GUIDE INNER A [7].
[7]
[5]
[5]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[4]
5-9
GUIDE OUTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Tray document. (See TRAY DOCUMENT)

Remove the Cover TX side F. (See COVER TX SIDE F)
Remove the Guide inner A [1]. (See GUIDE INNER A)
Remove the GUIDE OUTER [2].
[1]
[2]
5-10
ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove one Plastic ring [1].
Slide the Bearing [2] toward the center.
Remove Gear 40 0.6B [3].
Remove the ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR [4].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-11
ROLLER PICKUP/ROLLER SEPARATOR

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the ASSY shaft separator. (See ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR)
Remove one E-ring [1].
Remove one E-ring [2], then remove the ROLLER PICKUP [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
5. Remove three E-rings [4] and two Bearings D6 8 [5].

6. Remove one parallel pin [6] and the Shaft separator [7].
7. Remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR [8].
[4]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[5]
5-12
ROLLER FEED
1. Remove the Guide inner A [1]. (See GUIDE INNER A)
2. Remove three screws [2] and the Spring P earth [3].
3. Open the Guide inner B [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4. Remove two E-rings [5], two Bearings [6], and one Gear 27 0.5 [7].
[5]
[7]
[6]
[6]
5-13
[5]
5. Lift the ROLLER FEED [8] and remove by sliding as shown in below.
[8]
[8]
5-14
ROLLER EXIT ADF

1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Guide inner A [1]. (See GUIDE INNER A)

Remove the Spring P earth. (See ROLLER FEED)
Open the Guide inner B [2].
Remove two E-rings [3], one Bearing [4], and one Gear 27 0.5 oneway [5].
[3]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[4]
5. Remove the ROLLER EXIT ADF [6] by sliding it.
[6]
5-15
[3]
ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the ASSY shaft separator. (See ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR)
Release two hooks [1], then remove the ASSY cover separator [2].
Remove the ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
5-16
MOTOR (STEPPING)
1.
2.
3.
4.

Release the Cable tie [1].
Disconnect the connector [2].
Remove three screws [3], then remove the Bracket motor ADF [4].
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [5], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [6].
[6]
[4]
[5]
[5]
5-17
SENSOR TXIL
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. (See COVER TX SIDE B)
2. Remove the Motor (stepping). (See MOTOR (STEPPING))
3. Remove the Gear 18/55 [1] and Gear 24/47 [2].
[4]
[2]
[1]
4. Release the Cable tie [3].

5. Disconnect the connector and remove the SENSOR TXIL [4].
[4]
[3]
5-18
ADF DRIVE GEARS

1. Remove the Cover TX side B. (See COVER TX SIDE B)
2. Remove the Cover TX side F. (See COVER TX SIDE F)
3. Remove the Motor (stepping). (See MOTOR (STEPPING))
4. Remove the APS bracket. (See GUIDE INNER A)
5. Remove the Guide inner A. (See GUIDE INNER A)
6. Remove the Gear 18/55 [1].
7. Remove the Gear 24/47 [2].
8. Remove Gear 40 0.6B [3].
9. Remove two Gears 59 0.5 [4].
10. Remove one E-ring [5], then remove the Gear 27 0.5 [6].
11. Remove one E-ring [7], then remove the Gear 27 0.5 ONEWAY [8].
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[1]
5-19
SENSOR (APS)
1. Remove the Guide inner A [1]. (See GUIDE INNER A)
2. Release the hook from the inside and disconnect the connector, then remove the SENSOR (APS) [2].
[1]
[2]
5-20
SENSOR DS1/DS2
1. Remove the Guide inner A. (See GUIDE INNER A)
2. Loosen one screw [1] and open the Guide inner B [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], then remove the SENSOR DS1 [4] and SENSOR DS2 [5].
Important
When attaching the parts, close the Guide inner B first, then tighten the screw [1].
[3]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
5-21
Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the Cover platen [1].

Lay the Sheet document press [2] on the document glass, leaving 1 mm of clearance from the left corner.
Peel off the backing paper from the double-sided tape [3] on the Sheet document press.
Close the Cover platen [1].
Lightly press down on the Cover platen to affix the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS [2].
[1]
[3]
m
1m
1m
[3]
[2]
5-22
5.2.2 Scanner section

ASSY COVER CONTACT
2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the ASSY COVER CONTACT [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Caution
When removing the ASSY cover contact, be careful not to break the Glass contact.
5-23
ASSY COVER TOP

1. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN)
2. Remove two screws [1], then remove the Cap hinge FBS [2].
3. Remove six screws [3], then remove the ASSY COVER TOP [4].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
Caution
When removing the ASSY cover top, be careful not to break the Pane.
5-24
FRAME SCANNER FBS

1. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN)
2. Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP)
3. Remove the Flat harness [1], then remove the Core [2].
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the Flat harness [1] from its path.

5. Release the BELT (TIMING) [4] from the hooks [3] on the Frame scanner FBS.
[3]
[1]
[4]
5-25
6. Lift up the Shaft guide [5] and remove the FRAME SCANNER FBS [6].
[5]
[6]
5-26
SENSOR HS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN)

Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP)
Remove the Frame scanner FBS. (See FRAME SCANNER FBS)
Release the hooks, disconnect the connector [1], then remove the SENSOR HS [2].
[2]
[1]
5-27
PCB LED-LAMP FBS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Release two hooks [1], then remove the Cover lens [2].
Release two hooks [3], then remove the ASSY case lamp [4].
Remove two screws [5].
Remove one screw [6] and disconnect the connector [7], then remove the PCB LED-LAMP FBS [8].
[5]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-28
HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove two screws [1], then remove the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-29
MIRROR A/B/C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the ASSY case lamp. (See PCB LED-LAMP FBS)
Release eight Mirror clamps [1], and remove MIRROR A [2], MIRROR B [3], and MIRROR C [4].
[1]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
Caution
Handle the mirror gently to avoid from breaking it.
Important
When reassembling Mirror A/B/C, be sure the front side faces inwards and the side with the marking
faces outward.
5-30
MOTOR (STEPPING)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove three screws [3].
Slide the Bracket motor FBS [4], then remove the Belt (timing) [5].
[3]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
7. Remove the Spring C tension [6] and lift up the Bracket motor FBS [4].
[4]
[6]
5-31
8. Remove two screws [7] and disconnect the connector [8], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
[7]
5-32
PCB SCANNER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove three screws [1], then remove the Plate shield PCB scanner [2].
Disconnect all connectors.
Remove one screw [3], then remove the PCB SCANNER [4].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-33
5.2.3 Panel section

PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION)
Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD)
Disconnect two connectors [1].
Pull out the harness [2].
[1]
[2]
8. Remove the Cover stay panel [3].

9. Remove four screws [4].
10. Open the Cover front [5], and pull the PANEL [6] forward to remove it.
[4]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
5-34
DISPLAY (LCD)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the Cover platen.(See COVER PLATEN)

Remove the ASSY cover top.(See ASSY COVER TOP)
Remove the Panel.(See PANEL)
Remove four screws [1].
Disconnect the connector [2] from the Speaker and remove the Cover panel lower [3].
* If the connector is not disconnected, the Speaker harness may break. Be sure to disconnect the connector.
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove four screws [4], then remove the Cover PCB panel [5].
7. Disconnect six connectors [6].
8. Remove three screws [7], then remove the Frame panel [8].
[4]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[4]
[6]
[6]
[7]
[7]
[8]
[7]
[6]
5-35
[6]
9. Remove two screws [9], then remove the DISPLAY (LCD) [10].
[9]
[10]
[9]
Caution
Handle the LCD gently to avoid from breaking it.
If the LCD breaks and the liquid comes into contact with your hands, rinse with water. If the liquid
enters your eyes or mouth, rinse with water and consult a physician.
5-36
SPEAKER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the Panel. (See PANEL)
Remove the Cover panel lower. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
Remove two screws [1], then remove the SPEAKER [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-37
PCB PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the Cover PCB panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
Disconnect six connectors [1].
Remove four screws [2], then remove the PCB PANEL [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-38
PCB PANEL KEY1/KEY2

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove the Cover PCB panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
Remove the Frame panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
Remove three screws [1], then remove the PCB PANEL KEY1 [2].
Remove one screw [3], then remove the PCB PANEL KEY2 [4].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
5-39
5.2.4 PCB section

PCB PDL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove two PCB-PS [2].
Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the PCB ASSY PDL [4].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
7. Remove four screws [5] and remove the PCB PDL [6].
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[5]
5-40
POWER-SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Disconnect all Power-supply [1] connectors.
Remove three screws [2].
Remove the POWER-SUPPLY [1].
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
5-41
PCB IS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Cover connect.(See COVER CONNECT)

Remove the Cover option.(See COVER OPTION)
Remove the Cover shield.(See COVER SHIELD)
Remove five screws [1].
Remove one PCB-P [2] from the PCB IS, then remove the PCB IS [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
6. Remove the CF card [4].
[4]
5-42
PCB LPH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the PCB ASSY PDL. (See PCB PDL)
Disconnect all PCB LPH [1] connectors.
Remove four screws [2], then remove the PCB LPH [1].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
5-43
PCB MAIN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Remove the PCB ASSY PDL. (See PCB PDL)
Remove the PCB IS. (See PCB IS)
Remove two screws [1], then remove the Plate main B [2].
Remove one screw [3], then remove the Bracket lime [4].
Disconnect all PCB Main [5] connectors.
Remove nine screws [6], then remove the PCB MAIN [5].
[1]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[6]
5-44
[5]
[1]
[2]
PCB NCU
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove two screws, then remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION)
Open the Cover front [1].
Remove the Cover left [3] while pressing down on the two hooks.
[2]
[1]
[3]
5. Remove one screw [4] and release the Cable-clamp [5] on the harness. Then pull out the Plate NCU1 [6].
6. Disconnect the connector [7] and remove the PCB NCU [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[5]
5-45
PCB PSU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the Cover front. (See PCB NCU)
Remove one screw. (See PCB NCU)
Release two hooks and remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU)
Disconnect the connector and remove the PCB NCU. (See PCB NCU)
Remove two screws [1], then pull the PCB PSU [2] out slightly and disconnect three connectors.
Remove the PCB PSU [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Important
The far end of the PCB PSU is engaged with the hook. When assembling, make sure to engage it with
the hook.
5-46
PCB CONNECT LPH

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Disconnect all connectors between the Chassis FBS and PCB main.
Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK)
Open the Cover jam access [1].
Remove seven screws [2].
* Note the markings on the Chassis FBS to locate the proper screws.
8. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Chassis FBS [4].
[4]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
9. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Cover left [6]. (See PCB NCU)
10. Remove three screws [7], then remove the Tray paper exit [8].
[7]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[7]
[6]
5-47
11. Disconnect two connectors [9].

12. Remove two screws [10], then remove the PCB CONNECT LPH [11].
[10]
[9]
[11]
[9]
[10]
5-48
5.2.5 Printer section

TRAY A MP/MP FLAPPER PAD
1. Open the Tray A MP [1].
2. Release two hooks [2], then remove the TRAY A MP [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Peel off the MP FLAPPER PAD [3].
[3]
5-49
COVER FRONT
1. Pull out the ASSY cassette [1].
2. Open the COVER FRONT [2] and remove it by releasing two hooks.
[1]
[2]
5-50
COVER OPTION/COVER SHIELD

1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT)
2. Remove two screws [1], then remove the COVER OPTION [2].
3. Remove nine screws [3], then remove the COVER SHIELD [4].
[3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
5-51
COVER BACK
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove two screws [1], then remove the Cover back [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-52
COVER JAM ACCESS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the Stopper JAC [2].
Disconnect the PCB ERS lamp connector [3].
Remove the Stopper sensor [4].
Remove one screw [5], then remove the Sheet blind [6] and remove the harness from its path.
Remove the COVER JAM ACCESS [1].
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
5-53
SOLENOID
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove one screw [1], then remove the Bracket SLND [2].
Disconnect the connector [3] and cut the Cable tie [4].
Remove one screw [5], then remove the SOLENOID [6].
[6]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[4]
5-54
[3]
CLUTCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove two Stopper rings [1].
Disconnect two connectors [2].
Remove two CLUTCHes [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
5-55
RX MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove four screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], then remove the RX MOTOR [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
5-56
[1]
MOTOR (STEPPING)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH)
Remove two screws [1], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
5-57
FRAME DRIVE/GEARS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove three screws [1], then remove the Ground wire [2].
Remove five screws [3], then remove the FRAME DRIVE [4].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
7. Remove the GEAR 54/28H [5].

8. Remove the GEAR 73H/23H [6].
9. Remove the GEAR 61H 0.6 [7].
[4]
[6]
[5]
[7]
5-58
10. Remove the Clutch. (See CLUTCH)

11. Remove the GEAR 59H/19 [8].
12. Remove the GEAR 35/19 [9].
13. Remove the GEAR 20 1.0A [10].
14. Remove the GEAR 21 1.0A [11].
15. Remove two screws [12], then disconnect the Ground wires [13].
16. Remove three screws [14], then remove the Stay pickup [15].
17. Remove the Spring clutch [16].
18. Remove the GEAR 34 0.8 [17].
19. Remove the GEAR 34 [18].
20. Remove the GEAR 41/21 [19].
21. Remove the GEAR 33H/37 [20].
22. Remove the GEAR 22 [21].
23. Remove the GEAR 57H/27H [22].
[10]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[22]
[18]
[20]
[21]
[19]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[13]
[12]
5-59
[14]
[13]
[12]
ROLLER TRANSFER
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the Stopper JAC [2].
Remove four screws [3].
Disconnect the PCB ERS lamp connector [4], and remove the Guide inner [5].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
5. Remove two screws [6], then remove the Cover bracket transfer [7] and Guide paper transfer A [8].
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[8]
[6]
5-60
6. Remove two screws [9], then remove the Bracket PCB LED [10].
[9]
[9]
[10]
7. Remove two screws [11], then remove the Guide paper transfer B [12] and the Plate discharge [13].
[13]
[11]
[11]
[12]
5-61
8. Remove one E-ring [14], then remove the Bracket transfer B [15] and the Bracket transfer F [16] from the
rear side of the Guide inner [5].
9. Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER [17].
[15]
[17]
[14]
[16]
[5]
5-62
ROLLER REGISTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the Cover jam access.(See ROLLER TRANSFER)

Remove the Stopper JAC.(See ROLLER TRANSFER)
Remove the Guide inner.(See ROLLER TRANSFER)
Remove the E-ring 4 (DR4) [1] and the E-ring 5 (DR5) [2].
Remove the Gear 16H 0.8 [3], then remove two Bearing presses [4] and Spring C presses [5].
Remove the ROLLER REGISTER [6] by sliding it.
[5]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[4]
5-63
[5]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[3]
SENSOR TRAYS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)

Remove the Sensor stopper [1] from the bottom of the body.
Lift up the Feeler MP [2].
Release the hook from the bottom of the body and remove the SENSOR TRAYS [3].
[3]
[1]
5-64
[2]
SENSOR JAMC1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)
Remove the Sensor stopper [1].
Release the hooks and remove the SENSOR JAMC1 [2].
[2]
[1]
5-65
SENSOR PSS
1. Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)
2. Remove one screw [1], then remove the Guide press B [3] while lifting the Feeler PSS [2].
3. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PSS [4].
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
5-66
ROLLER PICKUP MP/PAD PRESSURE MP

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Remove the Clutch [1]. (See CLUTCH)
Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)
Remove two E-rings [2].
Lift up the Guide paper MPDUP [3] and push down the MP pressure [4].
Remove the ROLLER PICKUP MP [5] by sliding it to the left.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[5]
10. Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP [6].
[6]
Important
When attaching the Pad pressure MP, align it with the notch in the main unit.
5-67
PRINTER FUSER
1. Open the Cover jam access.
2. Remove five screws [1].
3. Disconnect two connectors [2] and remove the PRINTER FUSER [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Caution
Before removing the Printer fuser, make sure the power cord is unplugged. Failure to do so may result
in electrical shock.
Make sure the Printer fuser become cool before removing it. The Roller heat is extremely HOT
immediately after operation and may cause burns.
Do not touch the thermostat or thermal fuse while performing this procedure.
5-68
ASSY INTERLOCK
2. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION)
3. Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD)
4. Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK)
5. Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH)
6. Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU)
7. Remove the Tray paper exit. (See PCB CONNECT LPH)
8. Open the Cover jam access [1].
9. Remove one screw [2], then remove the Plate upper FG [3].
10. Remove five screws [4], then remove the Plate FG exit [5] and the Frame upper [6].
11. Disconnect the connector [7] and remove the ASSY INTERLOCK [8].
[4]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[8]
5-69
[1]
SENSOR PDS/DPS
9. Remove the Frame upper [2]. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
10. Disconnect the connectors, release the hooks from the reverse side and remove the SENSORs PDS/
DPS [3].
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-70
ROLLER EXIT
8. Open the Cover jam access. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
9. Remove the Frame upper. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
10. Remove two E-rings [1], then remove the Bearing D6 9 [2].
11. Loosen two screws [3] in the Guide fuser.
12. Remove the ROLLER EXIT [4] by sliding it.
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
Important
When assembling Bearing D6 9, make sure it is aligned with the notch in the Frame upper.
5-71
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX

1. Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)
2. Remove the Guide inner. (See ROLLER TRANSFER)
3. Remove two screws [1], then remove the Guide upper JAC [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove four E-rings [3], then remove two Flange pulleys [4].
Remove the Belt (timing) [5] from the Gear 20/25P [6].
Remove two Gears 20/25P [6].
Remove four Bearings D6 8 [7].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[7]
5-72
8. Remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX [8].

[8]
5-73
TONER SENSOR (PCB TOS)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH)
Remove the Cover front. (See COVER FRONT)
Lower the Knob pressure [1] to the left.
[1]

9. Release two hooks [3], and remove the Bracket toner sensor B [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
5-74
10. Remove one screw [5], then remove the PCB TOS [6].
[5]
[6]
11. Release two hooks [7], then remove the Bracket toner sensor [8].
[8]
[7]
5-75
[7]
12. Remove one screw [9], then remove the PCB TOS [10].
[9]
[10]
5-76
SENSOR PES1
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st.
2. Remove one screw [1] using a short screwdriver, then remove the Bracket sensor [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PES1 [3].
[3]
[2]
5-77
SENSOR OPEN1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Release the hook and remove the SENSOR OPEN1 [1].
[1]
5-78
PRINTER HEAD
6. Open the Cover jam access. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
9. Open the Cover front, then remove the developer and the drum. (See COVER FRONT)
10. Pull out the Film harness [1].
11. Remove two screws [2], then disconnect the Ground wires [3].
12. Remove two screws [4], then remove the Stay LED [5] and the Bracket LED [6].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[6]
5-79
13. Push down the hooks [7] and remove the PRINTER HEAD[8].
[7]
[8]
[7]
Important
When inserting the harness, make sure it goes all the way in.
5-80
FILTER VOC
1.
2.
4.
5.

Remove the FILTER VOC [1].
[1]
5-81
5.2.6 Paper feeding section

ROLLER PICKUP (1st CST)/(2nd CST)
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st [1].
2. Remove one Stopper ring [2] and Bearing [3].
3. Remove the ROLLER PICKUP CST [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
5-82
[2]
ASSY PIECE PRESSURE (1st CST)/(2nd CST)

1. Remove the Roller pickup. (See ROLLER PICKUP)
2. Remove the ASSY PIECE PRESSURE [1].
[1]
5-83
PIECE COVER CST (1st CST paper dust)

1. Pull out the Cassette 1st [1].
2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the PIECE COVER CST [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
Important
Paper dust will collect in the Piece cover CST. Empty it when it becomes full.
5-84
SENSOR JAMC2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit.
Open the Cover jam access 2nd [2].
Remove the Sensor stopper [3].
Release the hook on the inside and remove the SENSOR JAMC2 [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
5-85
SENSOR PES2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pull out the Cassette 2nd [2].
Turn the Printer cassette 2nd [3] over.
Remove one screw [4], then remove the Bracket sensor [5].
Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PES2 [6].
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[2]
5-86
ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove two screws [2], then remove the Guide paper [3].
Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the Bearing D6 [5].
Remove one screw [6], then remove the Plate frame F [7].
Remove the ROLLER FEED 2ND [8].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[8]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
5-87
PLATE FRAME B
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2)
Pull out the Cassette 2nd. (See SENSOR PES2)
Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See ROLLER FEED 2ND)
Remove two screws [3], then remove the PLATE FRAME B [4].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
5-88
ASSY SHAFT JOINT (2nd CST)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the Printer cassette 2nd from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2)
Remove the Plate frame B [1]. (See PLATE FRAME B)
Remove three screws [2], then remove the Holder gear 2nd [3].
Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the ASSY SHAFT JOINT [5].
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
5-89
[2]
SOLENOID (2nd CST)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Plate frame B [1]. (See PLATE FRAME B)
Remove one screw [2], then remove the SOLENOID (2nd CST) [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-90
SENSOR OPEN2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Plate frame B. (See PLATE FRAME B)
Release the hook and remove the SENSOR OPEN2 [1].
[1]
5-91
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette.
2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS.
3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3>.

2. Select the paper source you want to adjust.
3. Select Vertical registration or Horizontal registration.
6. Adjust the printer registration:

For example:
When you set +12.3 for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set
12.3, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward.
When you set +12.3 for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you
set 12.3, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between 12.7 mm and
+12.7 mm.
7. Press [Enter].
NOTE
However you select cassette 1, 2, Bypass tray, or Duplex Unit in step 3, the adjustment in vertical
direction is copied to all other paper source.
5-92
Printer registration (top)
Test pattern H
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard
Setting Range
-12.8 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.1 mm step)
10 1.5 (mm)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load A4 paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0)
3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (See 3.12.2 Printer Test.)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the Printer registration mode, press Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> the margin.
6. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
5-93
Printer registration (side)
Test pattern H
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard
Setting Range
12.8 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.6773 mm step)
10 1.8 (mm)
1. Load A4 paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0)
3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (See 3.12.2 Printer Test.)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the Printer registration mode, press Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> the margin.
6. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
5-94
5.3.3 Zoom adjustment

FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1.40
0.10
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
1.25
0.15
0.40
2003-01
0.30
0.55
NO.20031021
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
1.0 %
Machine parameter:017
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
1. Load A4 size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass.
3. Make two copies on paper in the first cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.)
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 017 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-95
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
0.40
2003-01
0.30
0.55
NO.20031021
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
1.0 %
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-96
ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1.40
0.10
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
1.25
0.15
0.40
2003-01
0.30
0.55
NO.20031021
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
1.0 %
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF.
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 012 meets the specification.
5-97
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
0.40
2003-01
0.30
0.55
NO.20031021
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
1.0 %
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
2. Place a Test Chart in the ADF.
5-98
5.3.4 Registration adjustment

FBS registration (top)
1.25
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
Test Chart
0.15
0.30
0.55
A
0.10
1.40
Edge of the paper
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 2.2 (mm)
Setting Range
2.70 2.70 (mm)
(0.0212 mm step)
1. Load A4 paper to the first cassette.
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
5-99
FBS registration (side)
1.40
0.10
Test Chart
0.15
1.25
Edge of
the paper
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 2.6 (mm)
Setting Range
10.76 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
1. Load A4 paper to the 1st cassette.
3. Make a copy of it in the first cassette with 100 % magnification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-100
ADF registration (top)
1.25
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
Test Chart
0.15
0.30
0.55
A
0.10
1.40
Edge of the paper
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 2.2 (mm)
Setting Range
10.76 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
3. Make a copy of it in the first cassette with 100 % magnification.
5-101
ADF registration (side)
1.40
0.10
Test Chart
0.15
1.25
Edge of
the paper
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 2.9 (mm)
Setting Range
10.76 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
5-102
5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment

1. Open the Guide outer.
2. Pick up the Assy Shaft Separator.
3. Remove the Assy Piece Separator. (See page 5-16)
4. Adjust the separation pressure.
Rotate direction
Separation pressure
Clockwise
Up
Counterclockwise
Down
Cover separator
Roller separator
5-103
5.3.6 FBS skew adjustment

When the image scanned with the document glass is skewed, you can adjust it by shifting a part.
1. Open the platen cover, and remove Assy Cover Contact. (see page 5-23)
2. Loosen two screws securing the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE.
3. Slide the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE to the right (the direction indicated with arrow) to adjust its position.
4. When the adjustment is over, tighten the screws and reattach the Assy Cover Contact.
5-104
PARTS CATALOGUE
product code
DC4450
Konica Minolta
240f
EUR
date
2010/03/10 AA
<HOW TO USE THIS CATALOGUE>

1. INTRODUCTION
Before placing a purchase order for spare parts, please read following instructions to avoid any misunderstandings.
2. DEFINITION
In this catalogue, a part means each component of a fax machine. Every part has its own name and own number in order to distinguish each other.
3. HOW TO SEE THIS CATALOGUE
1Page of "PARTS LIST"
Example: DB5001
<1>
PARTS LIST
<11>
DB5-005
<4>
NO
<5>
001-001
101
102
2Page of "CONTENTS"
Example: DB5-001
DB5-002
DB5-003
DB5-004
DB5-005
(1) Explanation :
<1> DB5001
<2> DATE 2006/07/06
<3> PAGE 7
<4> DB5-005
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
NO
PART NO
PART NAME
Q'TY
PART NO
2006/07/06
<6> PART NAME
DB5-A0050-4X
ZA1-02931-20
D67-01280-6X
<4>
DATE
ASSY MOTOR
MOTOR
BEARING
TRAY DOCUMENT
COVER PLATEN
ADF GUIDE OUTER
ADF GUIDE INNER
ADF MOTOR
<2>
PAGE
<7> QTY
1
1
3
<3>
<8> UNIT PRICE(USD)

35.45
1.66
<12>
: Product code is six-digit alphanumeric, and shows the model and specification.
: Creation date of PARTS LIST.
: Page number of PARTS LIST.
: Screen page number of this parts catalogue.
DB5-005 means fifth screen page of the catalogue.
: Represents reference number of each part in the illustration.
: Part number.
: Name of the part.
: The quantity of the part which this Index No indicates.
<9> REMARK
<10>
<9> UNIT PRICE(USD) : Price of the part, and word in parenthesis is currency.
The price shown on this catalogue is the "List Price".
When you calculate the distributor's price, please truncate the calculated price to 2 decimal places
<10> REMARK
: Meaning the recital.
<11> *
: Parts marked with an asterisk are disapproved for sale. So, prices for those parts are not shown .
<12> ADF MOTOR
: Represents reference appellation of each part in the screen page.
(2) HOW TO USE THIS CATALOGUE
The catalogue consists of an illustration and Parts List. Please identify your requested part in the illustration on the left page,
find the index number and look through the right page to find the part number of the required component.
4. PART NUMBER
The most important information is the part number.
(3 digits)
+ (5 digits)
+ (2 or 3 digits) = 10 or 11 digits
DB5 - 08010 - 5 X X
Model code
Part code
<1> Model code

<2> Level code
<4> Sub Number
Sub Number
Level code
: Specifies the model. Since some parts are common to several models, there are some parts
whose Model Code differs from the other parts, though they are all a part of a machine of one
product code.
: Represents the level of parts assembly
6 : Not an assembled part
5 : Several parts are assembled.
4 : Several level 6 and/or level 5 parts are assembled
3 : Level 6, level 5, and/or level 4 parts are assembled.
: Represents the specification and revision of parts. The letter "X" is where the revision of parts is
shown. When you order a part, please write the exact part number shown on your catalogue. We
will supply the part with the latest version.
EXCEPTION ; The above rule is not applied to the parts with numbers which start with ZA1 (Ex,:ZA1-00432-70), DCB, DFG
since they are purchased from other vendors. So please write the number exactly the same as shown on the list.
Please do NOT write X unless the part number actually includes X.
*NOTICE
Supplying Time : Contract term with customer.
Change of parts price : About parts price of this catalogue is subject to change without notice based on various reasons.
Please be forewarned.
DC4 CONTENTS
DC4-001 ADF COVER PLATEN
DC4-081 ACCESSORY 1
DC4-002 ADF GUIDE
DC4-082 ACCESSORY 2
DC4-003 ADF MOTOR
DC4-083 ENCLOSURE
DC4-010 PANEL
DC4-091 COMSUMABLE
DC4-011 TOP COVER
DC4-902 PARTS ADF GUIDE
DC4-012 CHASSIS SCANNER
DC4-911 PARTS TOP COVER
DC4-013 FBS FRAME SCANNER
DC4-913 PARTS FBS FRAME SCANNER
DC4-014 PRINTER COVER
DC4-914 PARTS PRINTER COVER
DC4-015 PRINTER POWER SUPPLY/NCU
DC4-917 PARTS PRINTER CHASSIS 1
DC4-016 PRINTER PCB MAIN
DC4-921 PARTS PRINTER DRIVE 2
DC4-017 PRINTER CHASSIS 1
DC4-923 PARTS PRINTER FUSER
DC4-925 PARTS PRINTER TRANSFER
DC4-927
DC4-020 PRINTER DRIVE 1

DC4-022 PRINTER EXIT
DC4-023 PRINTER FUSER
DC4-024 PRINTER JAM ACCESS COVER
DC4-025 PRINTER TRANSFER
DC4-026 PRINTER MALTI PURPOSE
DC4-027 PRINTER CASSETTE 1ST
1/1
PARTS PRINTER CASSETTE 1ST
DC4-001
115
112
114
103
104
106
105
105
AHB01
AHB01
104
103
105
105
101
113
AHB01
AHB01
ADG04
AUD01
AFF01
107
109
AFF01
108
109
103
110
AFF01
AFF01
111
102
AFF01
1A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 001
NO
001
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
DA7
DA7
D82
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z90
Z90
DA7
DA7
01011
01120
01140
01150
01100
01190
01110
01140
01090
01160
01180
64611
64610
01031
01041
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
0X
6X
6X
COVER PLATEN
SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS
TX PRESS ROLLER
SHAFT PRESS ROLLER B
SPRING C A
SHEET PLATEN B
BRUSH A
SHAFT PRESS ROLLER A
SPRING P A
STAY PLATEN
SHEET PLATEN A
HINGE R
HINGE L
COVER TX SIDE F
COVER TX SIDE B
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
5
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
AVA03
AQA03
DC4-002
109
112
127
ANB01
114
110
104
115
106
(DC4-902 003)
ALA01
113
123
122
124
119
120
111
117
132
102
137
AFF01
125
128
ANB03
135
133
137
101
131
AFF01
(002-146)
150
136
143
130
141
134
ANB01
118
137
(002-141,002-142,
003-101,003-110)
105
116
(DC4-902 002)
121
108
145
AFF01
107
ANB03
126
146(016-133)
(DC4-902 001)
103
ANB03
AFF01
141
AFF01
147(003-102)
AEH01
AFF01
148
AFF01
(002-146)
137
ANB03
128
129
142
139
140
144
138
2A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 002
NO
002
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z07
DA7
DA7
D84
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D84
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
01201
01400
01380
01330
01340
01300
01470
01220
01310
01320
01350
01390
01480
01490
01130
54140
0155K
01640
11890
01540
01620
0156K
01570
11950
01290
01021
01170
01500
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
GUIDE INNER A
SHAFT SEPARATOR
ROLLER PICKUP
SHAFT PICKUP
PULLEY 20
HUB PICKUP
SPRING C CLUTCH
ARM PICKUP
HUB SEPARATOR A
HUB SEPARATOR B
PULLEY 24
ROLLER SEPARATOR
SPRING C ONEWAY
SPRING C PICKUP
SHEET FELT
BELT(TIMING)
COVER SEPARATOR
SPONGE PICKUP
PICKUP PAD
SHEET SEPARATOR
PAD SEPARATOR B
PIECE SEPARATOR
PAD SEPARATOR A
SEPARATOR CUSHION
HOLDER SPRING SEPARATOR
GUIDE OUTER
FEELER DS1
SPRING C DOCUMENT PRESS
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 002
NO
002
PARTS NO
-
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
150
DA7
D28
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D67
D88
D88
D88
DA7
Z08
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
DFG
DA7
ZA1
01360
02120
01420
0141K
01430
01440
01460
01370
01280
0353K
03540
03550
08180
05572
01520
01210
01510
08380
S3S3B
01630
00921
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
0X
6X
6X
6X
4XX
530
6X
00
ROLLER EXIT ADF

BEARING D6 8
STOPPER DOCUMENT B
STOPPER DOCUMENT A
BRUSH B
FEELER DS2
SPRING C STOPPER DOCUMENT
ROLLER FEED
BEARING D6
FEELER APS
APS BRACKET
APS SPRING
PCB SENSOR
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
SPRING P EARTH
GUIDE INNER B
SPRING C SEPARATOR
ASSY ADF-CABLE
CABLE-ASSY
SPRING T SENSOR
CORE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-003
101
AJD02
109
102
(002-146)
AFF01
(002-146)
110
AFF01
(002-147)
112
111(014-104)
106
107
ADG04
105
AJD02
ANB01
108
104
106
ANB02
103
3A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 003
NO
003
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
ZA1
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
ZA1
02454
01230
01240
01250
01260
01270
0128G
01530
01450
08340
08570
01037
PARTS NAME
-
50
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
4XX
5XX
60
MOTOR(STEPING)
BRACKET MOTOR ADF
GEAR 27 0.5
GEAR 40 0.6 B
GEAR 24/47
GEAR 59 0.5
GEAR 18/55
GEAR 27 0.5 ONEWAY
SPRING P IL
ASSY MICRO-SW
CABLE-ASSY
CORE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-010
107
104
154
101
154
153
154
108
116 109
111
106
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
117
160
AFF01
115
161
169
110
131
114
(010-130)
(010-130)
AFF01
AEH01
AFF01
112
AFF01
AFF01
(010-144)
112
AFF01
AEH01
140
162(010-130)
AFF01
ADG04
AFF01
152
159
167
148(016-104)
163 (010-162)
ADG01
130
ADG01
168
159
AFF01
ADG01
AFF01
ADG01
149(010-130)
(010-140)
145(010-131)
144(010-131)
132
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
113
165
ADG04
141
(010-145)
ADG01
(010-130)
AFF01
(010-149)
ADG01
(010-140)
(010-140)
166
157(016-104)
ADG01
103
AFF02
AFF02
AFF02
AFF02
165
155
10B -4
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 010
NO
010
PARTS NO
-
101
103
104
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
130
131
132
140
141
144
145
148
149
153
154
155
157
DC1
DC4
DC4
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC1
DC4
DC1
DC1
Z90
DC1
DC1
DC1
DCB
DCB
DC1
DC1
DC4
Z90
03051 0306B 03181 0309W 0310B 0311P 0312U 0313W 0314V 0315W 0316W 0317W 0318P 03191 03200 08070 08030 08040 54610 0318T 08490 08500 H5084 51808 03361 03380 0310B 63712 -
PARTS NAME
6X
6X
6X
6X
4X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
5XX
5XX
0X
6X
5XX
5XX
50A
50A
6X
6X
6X
0X
COVER PANEL
COVER PANEL LOWER
COVER PANEL OVERLAY
COVER LED A
OVERLAY POWER
KEY TEN
KEY START A
KEY START B
KEY STOP
KEY MODE A
KEY MODE B
KEY MODE C
KEY MODE D
KEY MODE E
FRAME PANEL
PCB PANEL
PCB PANEL KEY1
PCB PANEL KEY2
DISPLAY(LCD)
KEY MODE D
CABLE-ASSY PANEL-KEY1A
CABLE-ASSY PANEL-KEY1B
CABLE-ASSY
CABLE-ASSY
COVER FINGERPRINT
TAPE PANEL OVERLAY B
COVER STAY PANEL
CABLE-ASSY PANEL USB CABLE USB
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 010
NO
010
PARTS NO
-
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167
168
169
DC4
DA1
DC4
D91
DC4
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
03070
03311
03091
08490
03170
01037
03697
03787
03788
03830
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
4XX
6X
60
30
40
60
10
STAY PANEL A
KNOB VOLUME
BRACKET LCD
ASSY SPEAKER
COVER PCB PANEL
CORE
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
Q'TY
REMARK
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
AFF01
DC4-011
107
AFF01
107
AFF01
106
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
104
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
102
101
103
(DC4-911 002)
(DC4-911 001)
11B
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 011
NO
*
*
*
*
*
011
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
106
107
D88
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
DC4
05480
05061
05220
05230
05021
05091
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6XA
6X
6X
6X
6X
BACKGROUND SEAL
COVER CONTACT
PANE
GLASS CONTACT
COVER TOP FBS
CAP HINGE FBS
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
2
DC4-012
ADG01
AJD02
129
139
ADG01
141
AFF01
140
135
123(016-104)
105 104
(012-116)
AFF01
ADG01
ADG01
AJD02
130(012-114)
107
137
102 ANB03
AFF05
125
(012-129)
109
128(016-104)
112
116
AFF01
ADG01
111
103
143
127(013-120)
AFF01
138(016-105)
(012-130)
ADG03
114
101
ADG01
ADG01
ANB02
ADG03
102
ADG04
121
ADG04
ADG04
AFF01
136
134
ADG03
AFF01
142
131
113
AFF01
106
AFF01
ADG03
AFF01
ADG04
108
AFF01
AFF01
115
144
115
ADG03
AFF01
ADG03
12B -6
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 012
NO
012
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
111
112
113
114
115
116
121
123
125
127
128
129
130
131
134
135
136
137
138
D88
D88
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
Z08
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
DFG
ZA1
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DFG
05330
05350
05020
05080
05100
05130
05140
0515G
05160
0501B
05100
05170
05200
05220
08020
2580B
08580
05630
03417
03694
03603
S3S3B
02808
05230
05240
05250
05260
S3S3B
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
6X
5XX
0X
40
80
10
512
30
6X
6X
6X
6X
506
FBS TENSION PULLEY

FLANGE B
SHAFT GUIDE
GEAR 65/27P
BRACKET MOTOR FBS
STUD D6 23.2
SPRING C TENSION
LOCK CARRIAGE
SPRING C FG
CHASSIS FBS
GEAR 32/44
STAY FRONT
BRACKET SCANNER PCB FBS
STAY FRONT SUB
PCB SCANNER
PIECE EXIT RIB
CABLE-ASSY
BELT(TIMING)
CABLE-ASSY
CABLE-ASSY
MOTOR(STEPING)
CABLE-ASSY
CORE
SHEET FBS LEFT
PLATE SHIELD PCB SCANNER
PLATE FG MAIN FBS
SHEET INSULATOR A
CBL-ASSY DFG-S3S3B-506(L=60)
Q'TY
REMARK
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
DC4 - 012
NO
012
PARTS NO
-
139
140
141
142
143
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
Z90
00921
02491
03814
03572
67805
PARTS NAME
-
00
00
30
50
0X
CORE
CORE
SHEET
GASKET
SHEET
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
107
AFF06
DC4-013
119
107
ADG01
118
(013-126)
AFF06
107
(DC4-913 001)
ACG01
AFF01
116
AFF01
124
115
109
101
117
ADG01
112
Bush
127
132
104
104
ACG01
106
AFF01
(013-131)
121
Bush
104
126(013-118)
129
104
104
(012-127)
130(013-127)
(013-120)
114
ABF02
109
113
ABF02
104
108
110
104
AUD04
ABF02
120
129
AUD04
ABF02
131(013-119)
104
105
(DC4-913 002)
13A -5
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
10
DC4 - 013
NO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
013
PARTS NO
-
101
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
124
126
127
129
130
131
132
DC4
D40
D88
DA7
DC1
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
ZA1
ZA1
DFG
Z08
ZA1
DC4
DCB
ZA1
05060
01050
05390
05240
10740
05030
05040
05050
05070
05080
05120
05130
05140
05150
05160
08110
08160
02387
02808
S3S3B
05572
00921
08230
I0221
03815
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
5XX
50
30
519
0X
00
5XX
50A
50
MIRROR C
MIRROR CLAMP
SLIDER
SUPPORTER LENS
SPRING P LED PCB
FRAME SCANNER FBS
MIRROR A
MIRROR B
BRACKET CCD A
BRACKET CCD B
COVER LENS
SHEET LED REFLECTOR FBS
HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE
CASE LAMP
HOLDER PCB LED FBS
PCB LED-LAMP FBS
PCB CCD T
LENS
CORE
CABLE-ASSY
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
CORE
CABLE-ASSY CCD_TO_HS
CABLE-ASSY
SHEET
Q'TY
REMARK
1
8
1
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
118
117
DC4-014
106
ADG04
120
ADG04
105
ADG04
122
AFF01
ADG04
AFF01
ADG04
AFF01
ADG04
119
ADG04
107
104
AFF01
ADG04
(DC4-914 001)
103
101
ADG04
116
126
109
ADG04
108,115
ADG04
111
112
102
14A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
11
DC4 - 014
NO
*
014
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
109
111
112
115
116
117
118
119
120
122
126
129
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DA7
DA7
D99
D13
DA7
D99
D99
DC4
DC4
DC4
DA7
D99
ZA1
3603K
0302B
0301B
03030
3619B
03040
36021
07020
0061P
03200
3672A
07350
07360
07030
36200
07050
37740
01510
03344
PARTS NAME
-
4XB
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6XA
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
30
COVER FRONT
COVER LEFT
COVER OPTION
COVER SHIELD
COVER BACK
COVER CONNECT
TRAY PAPER EXIT
LABEL COVER FRONT
MODULAR COVER
COVER MODULAR
SHEET COVER FRONT
LABEL USB DIRECTIONS
LABEL WARNING
ID LABEL
FILTER VOC
LABEL BARCODE
SHEET COVER B
LABEL LOGO ENERGY STAR B
GASKET
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-015
(015-103)
ADG04
(016-116)
ADG04
106
ADG04
101
104
103
(016-109)
107
121
ADG04
(015-101)
ADG04
(023-102)
102
ADG04
AFF01
15A -2
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
12
DC4 - 015
NO
015
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
106
107
121
DA7
DC4
DC4
Z06
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
Y8040
Y8900
36040
86657
00921
01037
02465
PARTS NAME
-
5XX
5XX
6X
1X
00
60
00
PCB NCU
PCB PSU
PLATE NCU1
CABLE-CLAMP
CORE
CORE
CABLE-CLAMP
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
DC4-016
(021-152)
118
(019-117)
140
137(020-108)
ADG04
108
ADG04
(021-129)
(019-126)
138
AFF01
ADG04
141
117(016-108)
106
SOFT
WARE
116(015-101)
125
(010-157)
ADG04
146
SOFT
WARE
ADG04
115
ADG04
ADG04
(019-131)
ADG04
148
147
(010-148)
ADG04
ADG04
ADG04
ADG04 125
ADG04
127
ADG04
121
128
134(016-133)
ADG04
139
132
(019-114,
020-101,
020-105,
021-120)
121
128
121
(021-130)
(021-134)
126
ADG04
126
123
SOFT
WARE
143
ADG04
(021-132)
(021-133)
(021-136)
(021-135)
ADG04
131
ADG04
ADG04
144
SOFT
WARE
ADG04
(002-146)
101(004-108,004-125)
ADG04
ADG04
ADG04
119
(016-134)
109(015-102)
ADG04
133
ADG04
ADG04
ADG04
(021-148)
ADG04
102
(021-131)
140
104
ADG04
105
140
ADG04
(012-123)
149
145(017-103)
(021-149)
141
(012-138)
138
112(023-141)
(012-128)
ADG04
(016-117)
ADG04
ADG04
ADG04
111(017-131,017-134,018-113)
130
(028-107,
028-133)
138
110(017-131,017-150,
020-108,021-127,025-128)
16A -4
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
13
DC4 - 016
NO
016
PARTS NO
-
102
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
112
115
116
117
118
119
121
123
125
126
127
128
131
132
133
134
137
138
139
140
Z90
MTD
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
MTD
DCB
DCB
DA7
DA7
Z06
Z06
Z07
Z08
DC4
ZX4
MTD
DA7
ZA1
DA7
DC4
ZA1
ZA1
ZA1
48829
38130
36020
36030
08080
08200
08400
08410
08530
38139
52656
H4008
05040
00080
86657
57520
99407
02293
36060
90000
38131
08260
02121
08500
08540
02491
01037
02465
PARTS NAME
-
0X
5XX
6X
6X
5XX
4XX
5XX
5XX
4XX
5XX
50A
50A
6X
6X
1X
8X
0X
0X
6X
30
5XX
5XX
00
5XX
5XX
00
60
00
Q'TY
POWER-SPPLY
PCB MAIN
PLATE MAIN A
PLATE MAIN B
PCB LPH
ASSY LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY-CABLE
CABLE-ASSY PRINTER
CABLE-ASSY CASSETTE
ASSY THERMISTOR-CBL
PCB ASSY PDL
CABLE-ASSY
CABLE-ASSY
STAY LEFT
BRACKET LIME
CABLE-CLAMP
PCB-P
PCB-P
PCB-P
PLATE PCL
CABLE-CLAMP
PCB IS
CABLE-ASSY FUSE
CONNECTOR
CABLE-ASSY
CBL-ASSY JAMC1
CORE
CORE
CABLE-CLAMP
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
3
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
14
DC4 - 016
NO
016
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
141
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
ZA1
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC6
DC6
DC4
ZA1
00921
SF001
SF008
08330
SF002
SF013
36180
02300
PARTS NAME
-
00
6X
6X
5XX
6X
6X
6X
00
CORE
SOFTWARE(MAIN)
SOFTWARE(IS)
ASSY INTERLOCK-CABLE
SOFTWARE(PDL)
SOFTWARE(PDL_ENABLER)
PLATE UPPER FG
CBL-CLAMP
Q'TY
REMARK
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-017
167
(016-110)
150
(016-110)
149
(DC4-917 001)
167
150
149
147
151
145
ANB03
141
ANB03
147
ANB03
161
142
146
147
128
AFF01
125
126
164
131
(016-111)
162
(016-110)
131
129
129
168
111
ANB02
AQA03
133
162
160
AQA03 AFF01
AQA03
ANB03
124
156
157
160
(016-112)
144
127
152
155
143
153
114
159
165
117
112
118 158
166
116
123
129
115
101
136
139
ANB03
AFF01
163
135
ANB03
137
AFF01
138
129
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
103
111
123
119
131
102
110
AEH01
134
(016-111)
107
(016-111) 120
AFF01
104
105
AFF01
109
108
106
AFF01
AFF01
17A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
15
DC4 - 017
NO
017
PARTS NO
-
101
102
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
131
133
134
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D48
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z07
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
Z08
DA7
D88
3601K
36050
36190
36200
36210
36220
36230
3720K
37210
00100
36290
08310
3742K
37430
3631K
36320
37250
37240
46743
37140
37570
37590
37150
37160
35510
05572
37440
09060
PARTS NAME
-
6XA
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
4XX
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
5XX
CHASSIS CST
PIN
BRACKET TONER SENSOR B
KNOB TONER
COVER KNOB
SPRING C TONER SENSOR B
SPRING C KNOB
FRAME CST
SHEET GUIDE PAPER A
FOOT
ARM IL
ASSY INTERLOCK
STOPPER KNOB
PULLEY WIRE
STOPPER DRUM
SPRING T STOPPER
FEELER PAPER CST
BRACKET SENSOR
MAGNET
GUIDE PAPER MP DUP
FEELER MP
SPRING T FEELER MP
FEELER PSS
SPRING T PSS FEELER
SHEET GUIDE PAPER MP
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
SHEET GUIDE PAPER D
PCB TOS
Q'TY
REMARK
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
3
1
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
16
DC4 - 017
NO
017
PARTS NO
-
135
136
137
138
139
144
145
146
147
149
150
151
152
153
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC2
DC2
DC4
D28
Z90
DA1
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
ZA1
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D99
D88
36590
36610
36620
36630
36650
35670
35630
35500
02120
56069
08570
37170
37180
37190
36240
37120
36260
36270
36280
36700
36250
02465
36730
36740
36750
36760
01470
37140
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
0X
5XX
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
00
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
WIRE RELEASE
SUPPORTER WIRE
GUIDE WIRE
BRACKET SUPPORT WIRE
SPRING T WIRE
SPRING C PRESSURE MP
ROLLER PICKUP MP
SHAFT PICKUP MP
BEARING D6 8
CLUTCH
CABLE-ASSY CLUTCH2
PRESS ROLLER REGISTER
SHAFT REGISTER
GEAR 15H 0.8
HOLDER CLEANER REGISTER
GUIDE PRESS F
SPONGE CLEANER REGISTER
SHEET SCREW CLEANER
GEAR 18H 0.8 C
SHEET DUST COVER S
SCREW CLEANER
CABLE-CLAMP
LABEL DRUM C
SPRING P BACKUP DEV
PIECE ARM IL
SPRING C IL PIN
STOPPER RING1
STOPPER SENSOR
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
DC4-018
103
103
104
104
103
103
104
105
AFF01
ABF02
104
108
102
ANB03
106
101
111
AFF01
AEH01
(016-111)
113
114
112
109
110
107
ABF02
18A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
17
DC4 - 018
NO
018
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D88
DA7
36070
36080
36090
36100
36110
36120
3613G
36140
36150
36160
36170
36220
09060
36770
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
6X
FRAME PRESSURE
PLATE SLIDER
PIECE PRESSURE
SPRING C DEVELOPING PRESSURE
SPRING C PRESSPLATE
SPRING C KNOB
KNOB PRESSURE
PIECE CAM
SHAFT KNOB
BRACKET TONER SENSOR
PIECE PRESS SENSOR
SPRING C TONER SENSOR B
PCB TOS
SHEET TONER SENSOR
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-019
118(019-110)
113
AEH03
(016-132)
AFF01
133
112
121
122
ACE01
117(016-108)
127
108
AFF01
105
ANB03
106
108
(019-131)
ADG01
110
AFF01
107
104 125
AFF01
(019-103)
ADH01
103(019-110)
101
ADG04
ADG04
102
ANB03
109
129
AFF01
103(019-110)
ADG01
111
130
AFF01
ADG04
129
123
AFF01
ACE01
(022-102)
129
128
ACG01
114
ADH01
(019-103)
AFF01
131(019-110)
ADG01
124
(019-118)
AFF01
AFF01
104
125
132
(019-116)
ADG01
126(016-108)
119
115
116(019-101)
19A -2
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
18
DC4 - 019
NO
019
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
113
114
115
116
118
119
121
122
124
125
126
129
130
132
Z90
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
ZA1
DFG
ZA1
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
ZA1
66467
36100
08480
36550
36410
36530
36540
36560
36580
36600
36670
37410
37480
08100
03416
S3S3B
00921
37730
37750
36790
36110
08320
36130
36150
03631
PARTS NAME
-
0X
6X
4XX
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XA
6X
6X
6X
5XX
20
512
00
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
6X
6X
60
PRINTER-HEAD
BRACKET LED
ASSY LEDHEAD FG
SPRING C BKT LED
GUIDE DRUM
STAY LED
SHAFT LED
SPRING C STAY LED
SUPPORTER WIRE LED
PLATE LED
GUIDE DEV
PLATE EARTH UPPER
PLATE FG DRUM
PCB CONNECT LPH
CABLE-ASSY
CABLE-ASSY
CORE
SHEET COVER A
SHEET COVER C
SHEET PLATE LED
SPRING P FG LED
CABLE-ASSY-LPH_TO_CONNECT LPH
PLATE LED FG
PLATE FG EXIT
CORE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
DC4-020
116
108
(016-137)
ABF01
113
(016-132)
114
111
115
AFF01
112
AFF01
110
106
AFF01
AFF01
101
107
103
104
AFF01
104
(016-110)
108
105
102
AEH01
(016-132)
20A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
19
DC4 - 020
NO
020
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z08
DA7
D67
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D88
34080
34560
34580
34590
34610
36340
37130
05572
34070
02660
25040
25050
25060
25070
37140
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
CHASSIS DRIVE
FRAME DRUM B
SPRING C FUSE
SPRING C HV
PLATE EARTH B
SPRING T FG A
GUIDE PRESS B
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
GEAR 34 0.8 A
SPRING WASHER
GEAR 36/17
GEAR 27 0.8
GEAR 18 0.8
ARM DRIVE
STOPPER SENSOR
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
DC4-021
128(016-108)
(016-132)
108
103
129(016-108)
AEH01
135(016-102)
122
123
122
AEH07
123
AEH01
134(016-102)
ABF01
123
ABF01
AFF03
122
ABF02
122
133(016-102)
152(016-108)
105
124
130(016-102)
132(016-102)
AFF01
AFF01
104
AFF01
116
150
148(022-132)
(DC4-921 001)
ALA04
111
ANB03
136(016-102)
115
118
144
109
AJD01
113
155
ADG04
ADG04
112
110
149(016-108)
AFF01
AFF01
148(023-125)
114
106
138
143
131(016-102)
126
107
146
146
AFF01
125
101
AFF01
139
ABF01
151
141
AFF03
ABF02
147
ABF01
120
121
122
AFF01
121
ADG04
(021-153)
142
140
119
ABF01
(016-110)
AFF01
127
ANB02
AFF01
ADG04
AFF01
ADG04
AJD01
ACE01
154
117
148(016-105)
AFF01 AJD01
153(021-138)
102
ADG04
21A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
20
DC4 - 021
NO
021
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
DA7
DA7
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D71
D88
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z90
ZA1
32050
34100
34020
34190
34200
34210
34220
34230
34260
34270
34420
34450
34460
35100
30160
34390
34400
34430
34440
34510
34520
34530
34540
34550
36330
36660
48683
03792
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
80
SPRING P BIAS TRANSFER

BRACKET SLND
GEAR 21 1.0
GEAR 59H/19
GEAR 35/19
GEAR 33H/37
GEAR 41/21
GEAR 20 1.0 A
COLLAR CLUTCH
BUSH D16
SHAFT JOINT
GEAR 40 0.8
HUB CLUTCH
SPRING C CLUTCH
GEAR 34
GEAR 22 0.8
GEAR 35 0.8
GEAR 34 0.8
STAY PICKUP
HOLDER BIAS
SPRING C BIAS
PIN BIAS
SPRING C BIAS B
PLATE HV A
SPRING C REGISTER GRAND
SPRING C EARTH SHAFT
SOLENOID
FAN
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
6
4
1
1
1
1
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
21
DC4 - 021
NO
021
PARTS NO
-
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
ZA1
DA7
DFG
DCB
DA7
DA7
ZA1
DFG
Z06
Z90
08480
08360
08370
08380
08390
08410
08420
08430
34010
34140
34160
34170
34280
34290
34350
02300
34600
S3S3B
20614
34120
37040
03598
S3S3B
50473
66621
PARTS NAME
-
5XX
5XX
5XX
5XX
5XX
5XX
5XX
5XX
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
00
6X
512
50A
6X
6X
10
509
4X
0X
CABLE-ASSY FAN EXTENTION

CABLE-ASSY CLEANING1
CABLE-ASSY CLEANING2
CABLE-ASSY DEVELOPER1
CABLE-ASSY DEVELOPER2
CABLE-ASSY CHARGER
CABLE-ASSY GRID
CABLE-ASSY TRANSFER
FRAME DRIVE
GEAR 73H/23H
GEAR 61H 0.6
GEAR 54H/28H
SPRING C COUPLING
SPRING C PRESS GEAR
COUPLING
CABLE-CLAMP
PLATE HV B
CABLE-ASSY
CABLE-ASSY
GEAR 57H/27H
STOPPER JAC
MOTOR(STEPING)
CABLE-ASSY
CABLE-CLAMP
MOTOR(DC)
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-022
(021-148)
137(019-110)
ANB02
ANB02
ANB02
AFF01
AFF01
134
132
AQA04
ADG01
116
117
ANB02
ANB02
124
134
112
113
113
126
133
AFF01 AFF01
107
122
ANB02
ANB02
121
138
123
133 117
116
106
ANB02
128
129
AFF01
ADG04
131
106
125
127
107
ANB02
115
135
ADG01
103
(016-120)
115
ADG04
(016-114)
118
ADG04
118
(016-112)
AFF01
118
115
130
AFF01
22A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
22
DC4 - 022
NO
022
PARTS NO
-
101
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
137
138
139
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D21
D82
Z08
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DFG
ZA1
DC4
37320
37300
37340
37260
37270
37280
37330
37310
37290
37350
02200
01160
05572
37460
37680
37690
37700
S3S3B
03572
36230
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
6X
6X
520
50
6X
FRAME UPPER
BRUSH DISCHARGE EXIT
GUIDE UPPER
PRESS ROLLER EXIT
FEELER PDS
SPRING C FEELER
PRESS ROLLER EXIT SIDE
SPRING C GUIDE FUSER
GUIDE FUSER
ROLLER EXIT
BEARING D6 9
TX GEAR 20
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
PIECE BUSH EXIT
ROLLER EXIT B
ROLLER GUIDE PAPER
SHEET EXIT
CABLE-ASSY
GASKET
SHEET VOC EXIT
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
4
4
3
1
1
1
1
DC4-023
AFF01
(021-148)
125
119
142
113
108
117
118
ANB08
139
AFF01
(DC4-923 001)
126
114
133
140
AFF02
123
143
AFF01
129
109
107
124
127
105
104
131
AFF01
135
104
105 127
104
138
ABF01 AFF01
130
AFF01
132
ABF01
AFF02
103
136
AFF02
141
AFF01
ABF01
128
120
ABF01
ABF01
122
117
115
105 127
AFF01
AFF01
ANB08
133
ABF01
ABF01
106
101
129
AFF02
137
110
116
AFF01
AFF02
AFF01
AFF02
(016-112)
121
130
AFF01
102(015-102)
23A -5
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
23
DC4 - 023
NO
023
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
DC4
DC4
DA7
DC4
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
08500
08560
33160
33400
33330
33010
33020
3304Y
33050
33070
33340
33110
33120
33350
33140
33150
3316Y
3317Y
33180
33190
33200
33220
33240
3325Y
33260
33270
33330
33290
PARTS NAME
-
5XX
5XX
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
CABLE-ASSY HEATER(FUSER)
CABLE-ASSY HEATER(PSU)
BRACKET THERMO
SPRING C SCRAPER
STOPPER SCRAPER
ROLLER HEAT
ROLLER PRESS
FRAME OUTER
GEAR 39 1.0
SPRING C STOPPER
CAP ROLLER HEAT
HOLDER BEARING PR B
HOLDER BEARING PR F
CAP ROLLER HEAT F
SPRING C PRESS
SHAFT CAM PR B
KNOB B
KNOB F
PLATE PRESS B
PLATE PRESS F
GEAR 18 1.0
PLATE HEATER B
PLATE FG
GUIDE ENTER
SCRAPER
SHAFT CAM PR F
BEARING HR
SPRING C KNOB
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
24
DC4 - 023
NO
023
PARTS NO
-
131
132
133
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
Z90
ZA1
Z07
ZA1
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
Z90
DC4
DC4
48827
03645
93182
03816
3303Y
33230
33300
33310
33320
55856
33360
33370
PARTS NAME
-
0X
60
0X
70
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
FUSE
THERMOSTAT
BEARING(ROLLING BEARING)
LAMP
FRAME INNER
PLATE HEATER F
BRACKET FUSE
PLATE FG PR B
SPRING T HR
THERMSTR
PLATE FG FUSER
SHEET FRAME INNER B
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-024
109
105
108
106
101
ANB02
115
112
103
119
118
AFF01
AFF01
112
111
113
123
110
ANB03
ANB06
116
AFF01
AFF01
120
111
ANB02
ANB06
114
113
104
106
117
113
ANB06
119
ANB06
110
ANB03
AFF01
124
124
118
102
113
124
AFF01
24A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
25
DC4 - 024
NO
024
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
123
124
125
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D28
D49
Z08
DA7
DA7
DA7
D91
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
3701K
37380
37390
37470
3702K
37030
07030
07050
25010
25030
25090
02120
02280
05629
25110
25120
25130
24800
25080
37500
37690
37010
PARTS NAME
-
6XA
6X
6X
6X
6XA
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
COVER JAM ACCESS

GUIDE UPPER JAC
GUIDE UPPER EXIT
SPRING T UPPER D
KNOB LOCK JAC
SPRING C LOCK JAC
LABEL COVER JAM ACCESS
LABEL KNOB LOCK JAC
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX
GEAR 20/25P
FLANGE PULLEY
BEARING D6 8
PULLEY TENSION
BELT(TIMING)
SHAFT PRESS D
SPRING C PRESS D
STOPPER PRESS D
PRESS ROLLER A
SPRING T FG D
SHEET BLIND
ROLLER GUIDE PAPER
SHEET GUIDE UPPER 0.05
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
3
2
128(016-110)
DC4-025
AFF01
120
127
AFF01
115
116
114
AFF01
AFF01
111
AFF01
AFF01
126
AFF01
AFF01
123
125
123
124
113
119
101
AFF01
110
ANB03
129
131
108
AFF01
106
AFF01
107
104
122
112 118
121
102
(DC4-925 001)
109
AFF01
131
AFF01
117
ANB02
103
ANB02
104
105
25A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
26
DC4 - 025
NO
025
*
*
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
DA7
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
D28
D88
D88
DA7
DA7
DA7
DCB
37060
37020
37080
37090
37100
37220
37230
32080
32130
32100
32090
32110
32030
36680
36690
32060
32070
32030
32040
32020
32010
02120
37040
37060
25100
37490
08170
D0224
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
50A
GUIDE INNER
ROLLER REGISTER
SPRING C PRESS
BEARING PRESS
GEAR 16H 0.8
SHEET GUIDE PAPER B
SHEET GUIDE PAPER C
GUIDE PAPER TRANSFER A
SHEET TRANSFER
COVER BRACKET TRANSFER
GUIDE PAPER TRANSFER B
BRACKET TRANSFER F
BRACKET TRANSFER B
SPRING P FG JAC
SPRING C FG SHAFT B
PLATE FG
GEAR 25H 0.6
SPRING C TRANSFER
SPRING C BIAS TRANSFER
PLATE DISCHARGE
ROLLER TRANSFER
BEARING D6 8
PRESS ROLLER AP
SHAFT PRESS A
SPRING P PRESS
BRACKET PCB LED
PCB ERS LAMP
CABLE-ASSY
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
27
DC4 - 025
NO
025
PARTS NO
-
129
131
134
135
DA7
DC4
D88
DC4
37660
32020
37140
37030
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
SPRING C PRESS B
ROLLER GAP
STOPPER SENSOR
SHEET PROTECT HARNESS
Q'TY
REMARK
1
2
1
1
DC4-026
101
110
111
108
106
AFF06
107
104
109
102
103
105
26A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
28
DC4 - 026
NO
026
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D55
DC4
DA7
D88
3751K
3752K
3753K
3754K
3755K
3756K
3760G
03270
35520
37650
35290
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
TRAY A MP
FLAPPER MP
GUIDE SIDE F MP
GUIDE SIDE B MP
TRAY B MP
TRAY C MP
KNOB FLAPPER MP
SPRING P PINION
MP FLAPPER PAD
SPRING C FLAPPER MP
GEAR 20
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AUD03
DC4-027
132
(DC4-927 004)
(DC4-927 003)
121
122
123
126
114
ALA03
105
115
113
116
104
125
106
(DC4-927 001)
107
131
117
115
132
123
127
126
127
102
(DC4-927 006)
118
(DC4-927 005)
101
119
108
120
130
(DC4-927 002)
110
124
103
109
AFF01
111
AFF01
112
129
128
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
27A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
29
DC4 - 027
NO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
027
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D88
D88
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DB2
DC4
D28
D65
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
3501K
3502G
3503K
35040
35050
35130
35060
3514K
07040
35120
35130
17060
35070
35080
35090
35100
35110
35120
3516G
3517G
37040
35010
02120
04320
3528K
35240
35230
35220
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
CASSETTE
GUIDE SIDE
COVER CST
PIECE PRESSURE CST
PAD PRESSURE
SHEET PRESSURE
SPRING C PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LABEL INDICATOR
FLAP STOPPER
SPRING C FLAP STOPPER
LABEL CASSETTE A
FLAPPER
PAD FLAPPER
SPRING C FLAPPER
ROLLER PICKUP CST
SHAFT PICKUP CST
SPRING C FG CST A
GUIDE END A
GUIDE END B
COUPLING APF
SPRING C APF
BEARING D6 8
SPRING C END GUIDE
GUIDE SIDE B
SHEET CST C
SHEET CST B
SPRING T FG CST B
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
30
DC4 - 027
NO
027
PARTS NO
-
129
130
131
132
DA7
DA7
DA7
D99
3527K
35300
3531P
01480
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
PIECE COVER
SPRING C END S
STOPPER END GUIDE
STOPPER RING
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
4
DC4-081
115
101
111
103
112
109
104
107
113 or 114
108
116
110
117
118
AFF01
81A -2
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
31
DC4 - 081
NO
081
*
*
PARTS NO
-
103
104
107
108
109
110
111
117
118
D88
ZA1
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z03
DC4
DC4
3547A
02491
01051
01061
01071
01080
80575
90290
90070
PARTS NAME
-
6X
00
5XA
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
LABEL PAPER SIZE

CORE
TRAY DOCUMENT
GUIDE DOCUMENT F
GUIDE DOCUMENT B
GEAR 40 0.6 A
CBL-CLAMP NK6N
MANUAL LEAFLET
MANUAL INSTALLATION
Q'TY
REMARK
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-082
102
101
82A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
32
DC4 - 082
NO
082
PARTS NO
- 101
- 102
DC4 - A120A - 4X
DC4 - A0010 - 3X
PARTS NAME
ASSY TONER CARTRIDGE
ASSY DRUM CARTRIDGE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
DC4-083
121
119
108
104
110
120
121
105
111
112
105
118
120
109
115
116
117
106
107
101
102
103
83A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
33
DC4 - 083
NO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
083
PARTS NO
-
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
115
116
121
DA7
DA7
D99
D68
Z06
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
D99
DC4
97030
97050
0009F
97020
99403
93080
93100
93120
93130
9505A
97220
97230
95070
93120
07050
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
6X
6X
1X
5X
5X
6X
6X
5X
5X
5X
6X
6X
6X
PACKING CP C
PACKING CP B
SEPARATION PAPER
MAT(FOR PANE)
JOINT
PACKING ST TOP ASSY
PACKING ST BOTTOM ASSY
PACKING ST ADF SPACER
PACKING CP ACCESSORY
PACKCASE UPPER
PACKING SPACER A ASSY
PACKING SPACER B ASSY
PACKCASE LOWER
AIRCAP
LABEL BARCODE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
DC4-091
102
101
91A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
34
DC4 - 091
NO
091
PARTS NO
- 101
- 102
DC4 - A120B - 4X
DC4 - A0011 - 3X
PARTS NAME
ASSY TONER CARTRIDGE
ASSY DRUM CARTRIDGE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
DC4-902
AVA03
AQA03
109
112
114
110
001
103
104
115
106
107
ANB03
003
ALA01
113
123
119
121
120
108
105
ANB01
116
002
122
124
ANB01
111
118
117
102
ANB03
902A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
35
DC4 - 902
NO
902
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
002
003
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
Z07
DA7
DA7
D84
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D84
A0670
A004A
A005A
01400
01380
01330
01340
01300
01470
01220
01310
01320
01350
01390
01480
01490
01130
54140
0155K
01640
11890
01540
01620
0156K
01570
11950
PARTS NAME
-
4X
5X
5X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR

ASSY COVER SEPARATOR
ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR
SHAFT SEPARATOR
ROLLER PICKUP
SHAFT PICKUP
PULLEY 20
HUB PICKUP
SPRING C CLUTCH
ARM PICKUP
HUB SEPARATOR A
HUB SEPARATOR B
PULLEY 24
ROLLER SEPARATOR
SPRING C ONEWAY
SPRING C PICKUP
SHEET FELT
BELT(TIMING)
COVER SEPARATOR
SPONGE PICKUP
PICKUP PAD
SHEET SEPARATOR
PAD SEPARATOR B
PIECE SEPARATOR
PAD SEPARATOR A
SEPARATOR CUSHION
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-911
AFF01
106
AFF01
AFF01
002
AFF01
104
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
AFF01
102
107
101
103
001
911A -1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
36
DC4 - 911
NO
911
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
002
101
102
103
104
106
107
DC4
DC4
D88
DA7
DA7
DA7
DC4
D99
A014A
A015A
05480
05061
05220
05230
05021
95080
PARTS NAME
-
5X
5X
6X
6XA
6X
6X
6X
6X
ASSY COVER TOP

ASSY COVER CONTACT
BACKGROUND SEAL
COVER CONTACT
PANE
GLASS CONTACT
COVER TOP FBS
PACKCASE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
107
DC4-913
111
001
ABF02
AFF01
115
ABF02
106
114
107
104
104
AFF01
109
101
117
ADG01
112
Bush
121
104
126(013-118)
104
129
104
ABF02
109
113
ABF02
104
108
110
104
ABF02
120
ABF02
104
105
002
913A -2
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
37
DC4 - 913
NO
913
PARTS NO
-
001
002
101
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
117
120
121
129
DC4
DC4
DC4
D40
D88
DA7
D99
DC4
DC4
DC4
D99
DC4
DC4
D99
DC4
DC4
DC4
ZA1
ZA1
A0160
A0170
05060
01050
05390
05240
93330
05030
05040
05050
93340
05070
05080
95070
05130
05150
08160
02387
00921
PARTS NAME
-
5X
4X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5XX
50
00
ASSY CASE LAMP

ASSY FRAME SCANNER FBS
MIRROR C
MIRROR CLAMP
SLIDER
SUPPORTER LENS
PACKING CRAFT PAPER
FRAME SCANNER FBS
MIRROR A
MIRROR B
PACKING PAPER TUBE
BRACKET CCD A
BRACKET CCD B
PACKCASE
SHEET LED REFLECTOR FBS
CASE LAMP
PCB CCD T
LENS * * F6,5
CORE
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
8
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-914
001
101
126
108,115
914A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
38
DC4 - 914
NO
914
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
101
115
126
DC4
DA7
DA7
D99
A018A
3603K
3672A
01510
PARTS NAME
-
3X
4XB
6X
6X
ASSY COVER FRONT

COVER FRONT
SHEET COVER FRONT
LABEL LOGO ENERGY STAR B
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
DC4-917
001
142
141
143
917A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
39
DC4 - 917
NO
917
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
141
142
143
DC4
D88
D88
DC4
A0530
35350
35360
35540
PARTS NAME
-
5X
6X
6X
6X
ASSY MP PRESSURE
PIECE PRESSURE MP
MP PRESSURE PAD
SHEET PRESSURE MP
Q'TY
REMARK
1
2
2
2
DC4-921
001
ALA04
111
ANB03
112
110
114
109
113
921A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
40
DC4 - 921
NO
921
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
109
110
111
112
113
114
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
D71
A0120
34260
34270
34420
34450
34460
35100
PARTS NAME
-
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
ASSY SHAFT JOINT

COLLAR CLUTCH
BUSH D16
SHAFT JOINT
GEAR 40 0.8
HUB CLUTCH
SPRING C CLUTCH
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-923
AFF01
(021-148)
125
119
142
121
130
113
108
117
118
ANB08
139
AFF01
001
126
114
133
140
AFF02
143
AFF01
107
124
127
105
104
123
129
109
131
AFF01
135
104
ABF01
105 127
104
138
ABF01 AFF01
130
AFF01
132
ABF01
AFF02
103
136
AFF02
141
AFF01
ABF01
AFF02
137
128
120
ABF01
ABF01
122
117
115
105 127
AFF01
AFF01
ANB08
133
ABF01
106
101
129
102
112
110
116
AFF01
AFF02
AFF01
AFF02
(016-112)
AFF01
923A -7
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/03/10
PAGE
DC4 - 923
NO
923
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
DC4
DC4
DA7
DA7
DC4
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
A019A
08500
95090
33160
33400
33330
33010
33020
3304Y
33050
33070
97250
33340
33110
33120
33350
33140
33150
3316Y
3317Y
33180
33190
33200
33220
33240
3325Y
33260
33270
PARTS NAME
-
3X
5XX
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
5X
6X
ASSY FUSER
CBL-ASSY HEATER(FUSER)
PACKCASE FUSER
BRACKET THERMO
SPRING C SCRAPER
STOPPER SCRAPER
ROLLER HEAT
ROLLER PRESS
FRAME OUTER
GEAR 39 1.0
SPRING C STOPPER
PACKING AC FUSER
CAP ROLLER HEAT
HOLDER BEARING PR B
HOLDER BEARING PR F
PLATE FG HR F
SPRING C PRESS
SHAFT CAM PR B
KNOB B
KNOB F
PLATE PRESS B
PLATE PRESS F
GEAR 18 1.0
PLATE HEATER B
PLATE FG
GUIDE ENTER
SCRAPER
SHAFT CAM PR F
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/03/10
PAGE
DC4 - 923
NO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
923
PARTS NO
-
129
130
131
132
133
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
DC4
DC4
Z90
ZA1
Z07
ZA1
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
Z90
DC4
DC4
33330
33290
48827
03645
93182
03816
3303Y
33230
33300
33310
33320
55856
33360
33370
PARTS NAME
-
6X
6X
0X
60
0X
70
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
0X
6X
6X
BEARING HR
SPRING C KNOB
FUSE
THRMSTR FS-61016 R180=7.0KOHM+5%-5% *
BRG(RB) W686ZZNR CHN
LAMP *JH110V750W/NO AC110V 750W
FRAME INNER
PLATE HEATER F
BRACKET FUSE
PLATE FG PR B
SPRING T HR
THERMSTR
PLATE FG FUSER
SHEET FRAME INNER B
Q'TY
REMARK
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DC4-925
108
001
109
AFF01
925A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
43
DC4 - 925
NO
925
*
*
PARTS NO
- 001
- 108
- 109
DA7 - A0140 - 5X
DA7 - 32080 - 6X
DA7 - 32130 - 6X
PARTS NAME
ASSY GUIDE PAPER TRANSFER
GUIDE PAPER TRANSFER A
SHEET TRANSFER
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
DC4-927
004
003
126
114
113
105
104
125
106
001
127
126
127
102
006
005
101
108
002
109
927A
DC4450
PARTS LIST
DATE
2010/02/19
PAGE
44
DC4 - 927
NO
927
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTS NO
-
001
002
003
004
005
006
101
102
104
105
106
108
109
113
114
125
126
127
DA7
DA7
DC4
DC4
DC4
DC4
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
DA7
A0150
A016A
A0320
A0330
A0340
A0350
3501K
3502G
35040
35050
35130
3514K
07040
35070
35080
3528K
35240
35230
PARTS NAME
-
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
ASSY PIECE PRESSURE

ASSY INDICATOR
ASSY FLAPPER
ASSY GUIDE SIDE B
ASSY GUIDE SIDE
ASSY SHEET CASSETTE
CASSETTE
GUIDE SIDE
PIECE PRESSURE CST
PAD PRESSURE
SHEET PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LABEL INDICATOR
FLAPPER
PAD FLAPPER
GUIDE SIDE B
SHEET CST C
SHEET CST B
Q'TY
REMARK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
DC4 FASTENERS
SIZE
PHR(3c)
M3X6
PHR(3c)
M3X8
3x6
S TITE(3c)
S TITE(P=3)(3c)
3x8
S TITE CUP(3c)
3X6
S TITE CUP(3c)
4X8
S TITE CUP(3c)
3X8
S TITE CUP(3c)
3X4
S TITE (3c)
3X6
P TITE(3c)
3X8
P TITE(3c)
3X6
P TITE(3c)
3X10
P TITE CUP(3c)
3X8
P TITE CUP(3c)
3X10
P TITE CUP(3c)
3X30
P TITE CUP(3c)
4X10
P TITE CUP(3c)
3X6
B TITE CUP(3c)
4X12
PHS(Ni)(3c M4X6
PHS(3c)
M4X6
PHS(3c)
M3X6
PK
2X10
PK
2X12
PK
2.5X24
DR(BK)or(3c)
3
4
DR(BK)or(3c)
5
DR(BK)or(3c)
6
DR(BK)or(3c)
7
DR(BK)or(3c)
2
DR(BK)or(3c)
DR(3c)
1.5
PARALLEL PIN
2X10
4
ZR(3c)
JR
E4
JR
E5
PARTS NAME
ABF01
ABF02
ACE01
ACG01
ADG01
ADG03
ADG04
ADG07
ADH01
AEH01
AEH02
AEH03
AFF01
AFF02
AFF03
AFF05
AFF06
AHB01
AJB01
AJD01
AJD02
ALA01
ALA02
ALA04
ANB01
ANB02
ANB03
ANB04
ANB05
ANB06
ANB08
AQA03
AUD01
AVA01
AVA03

Konica-Minolta MultiFunctional Printer 240f Develop D240F Parts and Service Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Konica-Minolta MultiFunctional Printer 240f Develop D240F Parts and Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

KONICA MINOLTA 240f

FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

4.2 Initial checks...................................................................................................................................4-2

5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

This supports the document so that it is fed straight.

Load the document here face up.

Document output tray Scanned documents are output here.

Used when printing on envelopes, transparencies, and custom paper

An optional paper cassette. Open this when paper jams.

Open this when replacing the toner cartridge or drum cartridge.

This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper.

This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper. This cassette is optional.

Connect USB memory here to save scanned images to USB memory or

This holds down the document.

This is where documents loaded in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)

Paper exit tray

Main power switch

Connect the power cord here.

Connect the LAN cable here.

Connect the USB cable here.

Connect a handset here.

External phone jack

Connect an external phone (such as an answering machine) here.

Telephone line jack

Connect the modular cable here.

Load the toner cartridge here.

Load the drum cartridge here.

Copy Specifications / General Specifications

>A4 SEF 24ppm (picking paper from 1st cassette)

Memory Backup (Standard)

72 hours (After 24 hours full-charge)

520506446 mm (Std. 2Way/1cassette)

>Acceptable Doc. Size

>>Multi pages Document Through Size

Scanning Alignment (ADF)

Document setting (ADF)

All modes: 600 dots/inch x 600 lines/inch

> Resolution(Color PC Scan)

>Contrast (Fax Tx)

yes, Auto, 5levels (default:Normal )

Duplex Print speed (Max.)

Recording paper capacity (Standard)

500sheets (Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)

>>Recording paper size

Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF),

Weight of Recording paper

60-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb(Casette)

Out put type of Recording paper

1st: (Standard) / 2nd: (Option)

30,000 sheets (A4/Letter, 2-page cycle print) and

>Set available functions(COPY)

yes (OFF, ON)

PC-FAX Basic Function

Direct Tx from Applications

yes (by FAX Driver)

yes (according to fax/email address in the address book)

Routing setting operation from machine control

yes (Control Panel/Browser)

>>Custom Size Setting

>Data Transfer Resolution

600 dpi x 600 lpi

PC/AT compatible machine

>>Windows Vista Enterprise

Select from Folder Shortcut